Daktronics All Sport 5000 Users Manual ED

All Sport 5000 to the manual 478c643c-0af9-4840-a747-6fefd2750cc4

: Daktronics Daktronics-All-Sport-5000-Users-Manual-511135 daktronics-all-sport-5000-users-manual-511135 daktronics pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 416

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

All Sport® 5000
Control Console

Operations Manual
ED-11976

Rev 16 – 10 September 2007

ED-11976
Product 1196
Rev 16 – 10 September 2007

DAKTRONICS, INC.
Copyright © 2003-07
All rights reserved. While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual, the publisher
assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. No part of this book covered by the copyrights hereon may be
reproduced or copied in any form or by any means – graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying,
taping, or information storage and retrieval systems – without written permission of the publisher.
®

®

®

®

All Sport , DakStats , OmniSport , Tuff Sport™ and Venus are trademarks of Daktronics, Inc.

Table of Contents
Section 1:

1.1
1.2
Section 2:
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5

2.6

2.7

2.8

Section 3:
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4

Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1
Important Safeguards.................................................................................................................1
Console Overview...................................................................................................................2
Revision History......................................................................................................................2
Basic Operation ....................................................................................................... 21
Console Operation ................................................................................................................21
Sport Inserts ...........................................................................................................................21
Sport Insert Operation Concepts ........................................................................................22
Start Up...................................................................................................................................23
Setting Radio Channels ........................................................................................................24
Single Controller Systems Channel Setting .............................................................................28
Multiple Controller w/Single Broadcast Group Channel Setting ............................................29
Multiple Controller w/Multiple Broadcast Systems Channel Setting ......................................30
Standard Keys .......................................................................................................................31
Start..........................................................................................................................................31
Stop ..........................................................................................................................................31
Enter/Yes .................................................................................................................................32
Clear/No...................................................................................................................................32
Edit...........................................................................................................................................32
Menu ........................................................................................................................................32
Set Main Clock ........................................................................................................................33
Count Up/Down.......................................................................................................................36
Auto Horn ................................................................................................................................36
Manual Horn............................................................................................................................36
Remote Start/Stop Controls ................................................................................................36
Main Clock Control .................................................................................................................36
Shot Clock Control ..................................................................................................................37
General Multi-Purpose Timer Information .......................................................................37
Standard Keys..........................................................................................................................37
Accessing the Multi-Purpose Timer ........................................................................................37
Accessing the Segment Timer .................................................................................................38
Segment Timer ......................................................................................................... 39
Segment Timer Overview ....................................................................................................39
Accessing Segment Timer....................................................................................................40
Accessing 2-Digit or 6-Digit Display Segment Timer ......................................................40
Segment Timer Keys.............................................................................................................41
Segment No x Time x ...............................................................................................................41
First Segment ...........................................................................................................................41
Last Segment............................................................................................................................42
Interval Time............................................................................................................................42
Display Interval .......................................................................................................................42
Copy Range .............................................................................................................................43
Auto Stop .................................................................................................................................43

Table of Contents

i

3.5
3.6

Section 4:

4.1

4.2

4.3

4.4

Section 5:
5.1
ii

Reset to First ............................................................................................................................43
Reset Current Segment.............................................................................................................43
Current Segment ......................................................................................................................44
Default Settings........................................................................................................................44
Edit ..........................................................................................................................................44
Current Segment ......................................................................................................................44
Menu .......................................................................................................................................44
New Code ................................................................................................................................45
Warning Time ..........................................................................................................................45
Dim/Bright ...............................................................................................................................45
Baseball Operations.................................................................................................47
Write the correct code number here.........................................................................................47
Baseball Keys .........................................................................................................................47
Inning +1..................................................................................................................................47
Out +1 ......................................................................................................................................48
Batter, Average, Clear Batter/Average ....................................................................................48
Ball Count, Strike Count, Clear Count ....................................................................................49
Hit, Error, Clear Hit/Error........................................................................................................49
At Bat.......................................................................................................................................50
Runs .........................................................................................................................................50
Hits, Errors, Left on Base ........................................................................................................51
Pitch Count, Foul Balls, In Play...............................................................................................51
Edit ..........................................................................................................................................51
Inning +1..................................................................................................................................51
Runs .........................................................................................................................................52
Hits, Errors, Left on Base ........................................................................................................52
Menu .......................................................................................................................................53
New Game ...............................................................................................................................53
New Code ................................................................................................................................53
Home Roster, Guest Roster......................................................................................................54
Display Menu...........................................................................................................................55
Edit Settings .............................................................................................................................57
Time of Day .............................................................................................................................57
Settings ...................................................................................................................................58
Main Clock ..............................................................................................................................58
Error Position...........................................................................................................................59
Auto Increment Pitches............................................................................................................59
Auto Increment Inning.............................................................................................................60
Score by Inning........................................................................................................................60
Inning Sequence.......................................................................................................................60
Display Innings ........................................................................................................................61
Display Time............................................................................................................................62
Select Captions.........................................................................................................................62
Switch Output ..........................................................................................................................62
Default Settings........................................................................................................................63
Pitch and Speed........................................................................................................65
General Pitch and Speed Information ................................................................................65
Table of Contents

5.2

5.3

Section 6:
6.1
6.2

6.3
6.4
Section 7:

7.1

Pitch and Speed Keys ...........................................................................................................65
Pitch Keys................................................................................................................................65
Display Speed ..........................................................................................................................65
Blank Time ..............................................................................................................................66
Speed .......................................................................................................................................66
Show MPH and Show KPH.....................................................................................................66
Cycle MPH/KPH and Cycle KPH/MPH..................................................................................66
Cycle Time...............................................................................................................................66
Pitch Count Keys (Home and Guest).......................................................................................67
Clear Pitch Count.....................................................................................................................67
Display Home/Guest Count .....................................................................................................67
Menu.......................................................................................................................................67
New Game ...............................................................................................................................67
New Code ................................................................................................................................68
Dimming Menu........................................................................................................................68
Radar Gun Type.......................................................................................................................68
Speed Adjust Coefficient .........................................................................................................69
Select Speed.............................................................................................................................69
Speed Indicator ........................................................................................................................70
Display Mode...........................................................................................................................70
Default Settings .......................................................................................................................70
RTD Item Numbers .................................................................................................................71
Frame Number and Pitch Types ..............................................................................................72
Clock Console Operation ........................................................................................ 73
Clock Console Codes............................................................................................................73
Clock Console Keys ..............................................................................................................73
Timer Start ...............................................................................................................................73
Timer Stop ...............................................................................................................................73
Set Timer Time ........................................................................................................................74
Set Reset Time 1 ......................................................................................................................74
Set Reset Time 2 ......................................................................................................................74
Timer Reset 1...........................................................................................................................74
Timer Reset 2...........................................................................................................................74
Menu.......................................................................................................................................74
Settings ...................................................................................................................................75
Basketball Operations ............................................................................................. 77
Write the correct code number here.........................................................................................77
Basketball Keys .....................................................................................................................78
Set Shot Time...........................................................................................................................78
Recall Shot Time .....................................................................................................................79
Time Out On/Off .....................................................................................................................79
Blank Player Foul ....................................................................................................................80
Period +1..................................................................................................................................80
Time Out..................................................................................................................................81
Score +1, +2, +3, -1 .................................................................................................................82
Team Fouls +1 .........................................................................................................................83
Bonus .......................................................................................................................................84

Table of Contents

iii

7.1

7.2

7.3

Section 8:
8.1

8.2

iv

Possession ................................................................................................................................84
In Game/Out of Game..............................................................................................................84
Delete Player............................................................................................................................84
Player .......................................................................................................................................85
Individual Substitution.............................................................................................................87
Mass Substitution.....................................................................................................................88
Edit ..........................................................................................................................................89
Time Out ..................................................................................................................................89
Score +1, +2, +3, -1 .................................................................................................................89
Team Fouls +1 .........................................................................................................................90
Period +1..................................................................................................................................90
Time Out On/Off......................................................................................................................90
Menu .......................................................................................................................................91
New Game ...............................................................................................................................91
New Code ................................................................................................................................91
Home Roster, Guest Roster......................................................................................................92
Display Menu...........................................................................................................................93
Edit Settings .............................................................................................................................95
Time of Day .............................................................................................................................95
Settings ...................................................................................................................................96
Number of Periods ...................................................................................................................96
Main Clock ..............................................................................................................................97
Shot Clock................................................................................................................................98
Time Outs.................................................................................................................................99
Team Score ............................................................................................................................100
Team Fouls.............................................................................................................................101
Select Captions.......................................................................................................................101
Select Team Foul Display ......................................................................................................102
Score by Quarter ....................................................................................................................102
Switch Output ........................................................................................................................102
Default Settings......................................................................................................................104
Football Operations................................................................................................105
Football Keys .......................................................................................................................105
Time Out On/Off....................................................................................................................105
Set Play Clock........................................................................................................................106
Recall Last Down...................................................................................................................108
Quarter +1 ..............................................................................................................................109
Yards To Go...........................................................................................................................109
Down +1 ................................................................................................................................109
Ball On...................................................................................................................................110
First & 10 ...............................................................................................................................110
Time Out ................................................................................................................................110
Score +1, +2, +3, +6, -1 .........................................................................................................112
Possession ..............................................................................................................................112
Yards Rushing........................................................................................................................114
Yards Passing.........................................................................................................................115
First Downs +1.......................................................................................................................115
Edit ........................................................................................................................................116
Time Out ................................................................................................................................116
Table of Contents

8.3

8.4

Section 9:
9.1
9.2

9.3

9.4

9.5

Score +1, +2, +3, +6, -1.........................................................................................................116
Quarter +1..............................................................................................................................117
Time Out On/Off ...................................................................................................................117
Menu.....................................................................................................................................118
New Game .............................................................................................................................118
New Code ..............................................................................................................................118
Home Roster, Guest Roster ...................................................................................................119
Display Menu.........................................................................................................................121
Edit Settings...........................................................................................................................122
Time of Day ...........................................................................................................................123
Settings .................................................................................................................................124
Main Clock ............................................................................................................................124
Play Clock..............................................................................................................................125
Time Outs ..............................................................................................................................126
Center of Field Yard Line......................................................................................................127
Auto Calculate .......................................................................................................................127
Select Captions ......................................................................................................................128
Score by Quarter ....................................................................................................................128
Switch Output ........................................................................................................................128
Default Settings .....................................................................................................................130
Hockey Operations ................................................................................................ 131
Shots on Goal Console Operation.....................................................................................131
Hockey Keys ........................................................................................................................131
Time Out On/Off ...................................................................................................................131
Enable Penalty Clocks ...........................................................................................................132
Disable Penalty Clocks ..........................................................................................................132
Minor/Major Penalty..............................................................................................................132
Period +1................................................................................................................................133
Penalty ...................................................................................................................................133
Time Out................................................................................................................................133
Player Penalty ........................................................................................................................135
Set Main Clock ......................................................................................................................136
Score, Shots on Goal and Saves.............................................................................................136
Clear All Penalties .................................................................................................................137
Delete Penalty ........................................................................................................................137
Edit........................................................................................................................................137
Time Out................................................................................................................................137
Score, Shots on Goal and Saves.............................................................................................138
Period +1................................................................................................................................138
Time Out On/Off ...................................................................................................................139
Menu.....................................................................................................................................139
New Game .............................................................................................................................139
New Code ..............................................................................................................................140
Home Roster, Guest Roster ...................................................................................................140
Display Menu.........................................................................................................................141
Edit Settings...........................................................................................................................143
Time of Day ...........................................................................................................................143
Settings .................................................................................................................................144
Main Clock ............................................................................................................................144

Table of Contents

v

Penalty Times.........................................................................................................................145
Time Outs...............................................................................................................................146
Select Captions.......................................................................................................................147
Switch Output ........................................................................................................................147
Default Settings......................................................................................................................148
Section 10:
10.1

10.2

10.3

10.4

Section 11:
11.1

11.2

vi

Soccer Operations..................................................................................................149
Soccer Keys ..........................................................................................................................150
Time Out On/Off....................................................................................................................150
Half +1 ...................................................................................................................................151
Time Out ................................................................................................................................152
Score +1, -1............................................................................................................................153
Other Increment and Decrement Keys...................................................................................153
Edit ........................................................................................................................................153
Half +1 ...................................................................................................................................153
Time Out On/Off....................................................................................................................154
Time Out ................................................................................................................................154
Score +1, -1............................................................................................................................155
Other Increment and Decrement Keys...................................................................................155
Menu .....................................................................................................................................155
New Game .............................................................................................................................156
New Code ..............................................................................................................................156
Home Roster, Guest Roster....................................................................................................156
Display Menu.........................................................................................................................157
Settings...................................................................................................................................159
Time of Day ...........................................................................................................................159
Settings .................................................................................................................................160
Main Clock ............................................................................................................................160
Corner Kicks, Saves, or Fouls................................................................................................161
Time Outs...............................................................................................................................161
Display Penalty/TOL .............................................................................................................163
Switch Output ........................................................................................................................163
Default Settings......................................................................................................................164
Tennis Operations ..................................................................................................165
Tennis Keys..........................................................................................................................165
Serve ......................................................................................................................................165
Matches Won +1....................................................................................................................166
Games Won............................................................................................................................166
Point .......................................................................................................................................166
Advantage ..............................................................................................................................166
Deuce .....................................................................................................................................166
Tie Break................................................................................................................................166
Reset Match ...........................................................................................................................167
Reset Game Score ..................................................................................................................167
Match Number +1 ..................................................................................................................167
Set +1 .....................................................................................................................................167
Edit ........................................................................................................................................167
Games Won............................................................................................................................168
Table of Contents

11.3

11.4

Section 12:
12.1

12.2
12.3

12.4

Section 13:
13.1

Points .....................................................................................................................................168
Set +1 .....................................................................................................................................168
Match Number +1..................................................................................................................168
Matches Won .........................................................................................................................169
Menu.....................................................................................................................................169
New Game .............................................................................................................................169
New Code ..............................................................................................................................169
Home Roster, Guest Roster ...................................................................................................170
Display Menu.........................................................................................................................171
Edit Settings...........................................................................................................................172
Time of Day ...........................................................................................................................173
Settings .................................................................................................................................174
Main Clock ............................................................................................................................174
Switch Output ........................................................................................................................174
Default Settings .....................................................................................................................175
Track Operations ................................................................................................... 177
Track Keys............................................................................................................................178
Reset ......................................................................................................................................178
Lane .......................................................................................................................................178
Place.......................................................................................................................................179
Home and Guest 1 Score .......................................................................................................179
Guest 2 and Guest 3 Score (Event/Heat) ...............................................................................180
Score +1 .................................................................................................................................181
Edit........................................................................................................................................181
Score +1 .................................................................................................................................181
Menu.....................................................................................................................................181
New Game .............................................................................................................................182
New Code ..............................................................................................................................182
Home Roster, Guest Roster ...................................................................................................182
Display Menu.........................................................................................................................183
Edit Settings...........................................................................................................................185
Time of Day ...........................................................................................................................185
Settings .................................................................................................................................186
Guest 2 and Guest 3 key function..........................................................................................186
Switch Output ........................................................................................................................187
Default Settings .....................................................................................................................188
Volleyball Operations ............................................................................................ 189
Volleyball Keys....................................................................................................................190
Time Out On/Off ...................................................................................................................190
Time Out................................................................................................................................190
Match Number +1, Games +1................................................................................................191
Score +1, -1............................................................................................................................192
Games Won +1 ......................................................................................................................192
Aces, Kills, Blocks, and Digs ................................................................................................192
Serve ......................................................................................................................................193
In Game/Out of Game............................................................................................................193
Delete Player..........................................................................................................................193

Table of Contents

vii

13.2

13.3

13.4

Section 14:
14.1

14.2

14.3

viii

Player .....................................................................................................................................194
Individual Substitution...........................................................................................................196
Mass Substitution...................................................................................................................197
Edit ........................................................................................................................................198
Match Number +1, Games +1................................................................................................198
Time Out ................................................................................................................................198
Score +1, -1............................................................................................................................199
Games Won +1 ......................................................................................................................199
Aces, Kills, Blocks, and Digs ................................................................................................199
Time Out On/Off....................................................................................................................200
Menu .....................................................................................................................................200
New Game .............................................................................................................................200
New Code ..............................................................................................................................201
Home Roster, Guest Roster....................................................................................................201
Display Menu.........................................................................................................................203
Edit Settings ...........................................................................................................................204
Time of Day ...........................................................................................................................205
Settings .................................................................................................................................206
Main Clock ............................................................................................................................206
Time Outs...............................................................................................................................207
Team Stats..............................................................................................................................208
UPDATE PLAYER? .............................................................................................................208
User Def 1 and User Def 2.....................................................................................................208
Select Captions.......................................................................................................................210
Switch Output ........................................................................................................................211
Default Settings......................................................................................................................212
Wrestling Operations .............................................................................................213
Wrestling Keys ....................................................................................................................214
Match Number +1 ..................................................................................................................214
Period +1................................................................................................................................214
Set Main Clock (Period Times) .............................................................................................215
Home Advantage, Guest Advantage, Stop Advantage Clock................................................216
Team Score +1, -1..................................................................................................................217
Match Score +1, +2, +3, -1 ....................................................................................................217
Start/Stop Injury Time ...........................................................................................................218
Reset Match ...........................................................................................................................218
Start/Stop Blood Time ...........................................................................................................219
Start/Stop Recovery Time......................................................................................................220
Edit ........................................................................................................................................220
Home Advantage, Guest Advantage......................................................................................220
Guest Advantage....................................................................................................................220
Blood Time ............................................................................................................................221
Injury Time ............................................................................................................................221
Match Number, Period, Team Score and Match Score..........................................................221
Menu .....................................................................................................................................223
New Game .............................................................................................................................223
New Code ..............................................................................................................................223
Home Roster, Guest Roster....................................................................................................224
Display Menu.........................................................................................................................225
Table of Contents

14.4

Section 15:
15.1
15.2
15.3

15.4

15.5

Section 16:
16.1

16.2
16.3

16.4

Weight Class..........................................................................................................................226
Edit Settings...........................................................................................................................227
Time of Day ...........................................................................................................................227
Settings .................................................................................................................................228
Main Clock ............................................................................................................................228
Blood/Injury Time .................................................................................................................229
Weight Class..........................................................................................................................229
Select Captions ......................................................................................................................230
Display Lines for Weight Class .............................................................................................230
Display Team Score...............................................................................................................230
Switch Output ........................................................................................................................231
Event Counter......................................................................................................... 233
General Event Counter Information.................................................................................233
Day and Time Event Countdown.....................................................................................233
Value/Days ............................................................................................................................234
Time Base Counter..............................................................................................................234
Value/Days ............................................................................................................................234
Increment Value.....................................................................................................................235
Decrement Value ...................................................................................................................235
Time Interval..........................................................................................................................235
External Input Counter ......................................................................................................236
Value/Days ............................................................................................................................236
Increment Value.....................................................................................................................236
Decrement Value ...................................................................................................................236
Menu.....................................................................................................................................237
New Game .............................................................................................................................237
New Code ..............................................................................................................................237
Dim/ Bright ............................................................................................................................238
Stop at Zero............................................................................................................................238
Karate Operations.................................................................................................. 239
Karate Keys..........................................................................................................................239
W (Wazaari)...........................................................................................................................239
H (Hansoku) ..........................................................................................................................239
M (Mubobi) ...........................................................................................................................240
J (Jogai)..................................................................................................................................240
Win ........................................................................................................................................240
Edit........................................................................................................................................240
W,H,M,J ................................................................................................................................240
Menu.....................................................................................................................................241
New Game .............................................................................................................................241
New Code ..............................................................................................................................241
Display Menu.........................................................................................................................242
Edit Settings...........................................................................................................................243
Time of Day ...........................................................................................................................244
Settings .................................................................................................................................245
Main Clock ............................................................................................................................245
Switch Output ........................................................................................................................245

Table of Contents

ix

Default Settings......................................................................................................................246
Section 17:
17.1

17.2

17.3
17.4

Section 18:
18.1
18.2

18.3

x

Tae Kwon Do Operations.......................................................................................247
Tae kwon do Keys...............................................................................................................247
D ............................................................................................................................................247
Gamjeom (G) .........................................................................................................................247
Kyong-go (K).........................................................................................................................248
Win ........................................................................................................................................248
√ .............................................................................................................................................248
Total On/Off ..........................................................................................................................248
Weight Class ..........................................................................................................................248
Round Length ........................................................................................................................249
Rest Length ............................................................................................................................249
Round Number.......................................................................................................................249
Menu .....................................................................................................................................249
New Game .............................................................................................................................250
New Code ..............................................................................................................................250
Reset Round ...........................................................................................................................250
Reset Rest...............................................................................................................................251
Display Menu.........................................................................................................................251
Edit Settings ...........................................................................................................................253
Time of Day ...........................................................................................................................253
Edit ........................................................................................................................................254
D,G,K.....................................................................................................................................254
Settings .................................................................................................................................254
Auto/Manual Timing .............................................................................................................254
Switch Output ........................................................................................................................254
Default Settings......................................................................................................................255
Judo Operations .....................................................................................................257
Judo Competitor Status ......................................................................................................257
Judo Keys .............................................................................................................................258
White and Blue Osaekomi .....................................................................................................258
Set Osaekomi .........................................................................................................................258
Sono-Mama............................................................................................................................259
Yoshi......................................................................................................................................259
Toketa ....................................................................................................................................259
Clear.......................................................................................................................................260
Win ........................................................................................................................................260
Ippon ......................................................................................................................................260
Medical Exam ........................................................................................................................261
Keikoku..................................................................................................................................261
Wazaari ..................................................................................................................................262
Chui........................................................................................................................................262
Yuko ......................................................................................................................................262
Shido ......................................................................................................................................263
Koka.......................................................................................................................................263
Edit ........................................................................................................................................264
Yuko/Koka.............................................................................................................................264
Table of Contents

18.4

18.5

Section 19:
19.1

19.2

19.3
Section 20:
20.1

20.2

20.3

Section 21:
21.1

Menu.....................................................................................................................................264
New Game .............................................................................................................................264
New Code ..............................................................................................................................265
Display Menu.........................................................................................................................265
Edit Settings...........................................................................................................................267
Time of Day ...........................................................................................................................267
Settings .................................................................................................................................268
Main Clock ............................................................................................................................268
Wazaari Time.........................................................................................................................268
Ippon Time.............................................................................................................................268
Medical Time.........................................................................................................................269
Switch Output ........................................................................................................................269
Default Settings .....................................................................................................................270
Boxing Operations................................................................................................. 271
Boxing Keys .........................................................................................................................271
Set Round Time/Set Rest Time..............................................................................................271
Round Number.......................................................................................................................271
Maximum Round Number .....................................................................................................272
Round Number +1 .................................................................................................................272
Menu.....................................................................................................................................272
New Game .............................................................................................................................272
New Code ..............................................................................................................................273
Dimming ................................................................................................................................273
Home Roster, Guest Roster ...................................................................................................274
Display Menu.........................................................................................................................275
Auto Time ..............................................................................................................................276
Time of Day ...........................................................................................................................276
Edit........................................................................................................................................277
Strikeout Count ...................................................................................................... 279
Strikeout Keys .....................................................................................................................279
Season Strikeouts...................................................................................................................279
Game Strikeouts.....................................................................................................................279
Strikeouts +1, -1.....................................................................................................................280
Display Control Keys.............................................................................................................280
Menu.....................................................................................................................................281
New Game .............................................................................................................................281
New Code ..............................................................................................................................281
Dimming ................................................................................................................................282
Edit........................................................................................................................................282
Strikeouts +1, -1.....................................................................................................................282
Cricket Operations................................................................................................. 283
Cricket Keys.........................................................................................................................283
Batsman Left, Batsman Right ................................................................................................284
Runs +1, +4, +6 .....................................................................................................................284
Runs -1...................................................................................................................................284

Table of Contents

xi

21.2

21.3

Section 22:
22.1

22.2

22.3

22.4

xii

Extras +1 ................................................................................................................................285
Extras -1.................................................................................................................................285
Wickets +1 .............................................................................................................................285
Wickets -1 ..............................................................................................................................285
Overs +1.................................................................................................................................286
Overs -1..................................................................................................................................286
Inning #1, Inning #2...............................................................................................................287
Edit ........................................................................................................................................287
Runs +1, +2, +3, -1 ................................................................................................................287
Extras +1, -1...........................................................................................................................287
Wickets +1, -1........................................................................................................................288
Overs +1, -1 ...........................................................................................................................288
Menu .....................................................................................................................................288
New Game .............................................................................................................................288
New Code ..............................................................................................................................289
Dimming ................................................................................................................................289
Home Roster, Guest Roster....................................................................................................290
Inning Settings Menu.............................................................................................................290
Time of Day ...........................................................................................................................291
Water Polo Operations...........................................................................................293
Water Polo Keys ..................................................................................................................293
Time Out On/Off....................................................................................................................293
Enable Penalty Clocks ...........................................................................................................294
Disable Penalty Clocks ..........................................................................................................294
Period +1................................................................................................................................295
Time Out ................................................................................................................................295
Player Penalty Start................................................................................................................297
Set Main Clock ......................................................................................................................297
Score ......................................................................................................................................298
Clear All Penalties .................................................................................................................298
Delete Penalty ........................................................................................................................298
Edit ........................................................................................................................................299
Time Out ................................................................................................................................299
Score ......................................................................................................................................299
Period +1................................................................................................................................300
Time Out On/Off....................................................................................................................300
Menu .....................................................................................................................................301
New Game .............................................................................................................................301
New Code ..............................................................................................................................301
Home Roster, Guest Roster....................................................................................................302
Display Menu.........................................................................................................................303
Edit Settings ...........................................................................................................................304
Time of Day ...........................................................................................................................305
Settings .................................................................................................................................306
Main Clock ............................................................................................................................306
Shot Clock..............................................................................................................................307
Penalty Time ..........................................................................................................................308
Time Outs...............................................................................................................................309
Switch Output ........................................................................................................................310
Table of Contents

Default Settings .....................................................................................................................311
Appendix A:

Reference Drawings .............................................................................................. 313

Appendix B:

Sport Inserts ........................................................................................................... 315

Appendix C:

Sports Code Numbers ........................................................................................... 317

C.1
C.2
C.3
C.4
C.5

Indoor Model Numbers .....................................................................................................317
Outdoor Model Numbers ..................................................................................................321
Miscellaneous Model Numbers ........................................................................................324
Custom Indoor Facility ......................................................................................................326
Custom Outdoor Facility ...................................................................................................326

Appendix D:

Quick Reference..................................................................................................... 327
All Sport 5000® Standard Keys .........................................................................................327
All Sport 5000® Segment Timer ........................................................................................328
All Sport 5000® Baseball ....................................................................................................329
All Sport 5000® Basketball.................................................................................................331
All Sport 5000® Football ....................................................................................................333
All Sport 5000® Hockey .....................................................................................................335
All Sport 5000® Soccer .......................................................................................................337
All Sport 5000® Track.........................................................................................................339
All Sport 5000® Volleyball.................................................................................................341
All Sport 5000® Wrestling .................................................................................................343

Table of Contents

xiii

Section 1:

Introduction

This manual is designed to explain the operation of the All Sport® 5000 Series console. For questions
regarding the safety, installation, operation or service of this system, please refer to the telephone
numbers listed on the cover page of this manual. To fully understand this manual and the operation
of the All Sport 5000 Series console; Daktronics recommends that all general sections be read in
conjunction with specific sport(s).
Important Safeguards
1. Read and understand all instructions.
2.

Do not drop the control console or allow it to get wet.

3.

Do not let any power cord touch hot surfaces or hang over the edge of a table that
would damage or cut the cord.

4.

If an extension cord is necessary, a three-pronged, polarized cord should be used.
Arrange the cord with care so that it will not be tripped over or pulled out.

5.

Always turn off and/or unplug the control equipment when it is not in use. Never
yank the power cord to pull the plug from the outlet. Grasp the plug and pull to
disconnect.

6.

To avoid electrical shock, do not disassemble the control equipment or the driver
modules. Incorrect reassembly can cause electric shock and faulty operation or
permanent damage to the circuits.

The box below is an illustration of Daktronics drawing numbering system. The drawing number
"7087-P08A-69945" is how Daktronics identifies individual drawings. This number is located in the
bottom right corner of the drawing. The manual will refer to drawings by the last five digits and the
letter preceding them. In the example, the drawing would be referred to as Drawing A-69945. The
drawings are located at the end of each section and in Appendix A.

Figure1: Drawing number location

Introduction

1

1.1 Console Overview
The All Sport® 5000 Series console is a state-of-the-art scoring and timing system. The
console’s liquid crystal display (LCD) will guide you through the operation of the system.
As a safety feature, this product has a 3-wire ground type plug equipped with a third
(grounding) pin. This plug only fits into a grounding-type power outlet.
Note: If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact a qualified electrician to
replace the obsolete outlet.
When opening the packages, inspect for shipping damage such as rattles and dents. See
that all equipment is included as shown on the packing slip. Immediately report any
deficiencies to Daktronics. Save all packing materials for shipping if warranty repair or
exchange is needed.

1.2 Revision History
Version 1.0
•

Initial software release

Version 1.0.1

2

Release Date: 3 January 2000

Release Date: 11 January 2000

•

Fixed the clock =0 indicator (period end) so it will update when count up/down is
changed

•

Made the shot clock not blank when the clock is set to count up

•

The time-of-day (TOD) clock only works with 60Hz, made so it will work with 50Hz
power also. This includes having it count this in the tenths/hundredths field so the
TOD will be in sync with the driver time

•

The timeout ON/OFF key does not allow for a cold key exit once it is in edit of the
time

•

Increase the refresh rate of the drivers

•

When set to TOD display, the TOD was not being sent out on RTD

•

Modified the soccer and baseball settings function to check if it is called while in the
game or before the game for certain settings that change what is displayed on the
scoreboards

•

Add code 0000 to do keyboard test and LCD test

Introduction

•

Add indication of console running from battery backup. Add message at console
power up to indicate that AC power was not connected. Add message to LCD and
sound beeper when AC power lost

•

Make shot/play clock horn turn off with reset operation

•

Make TOD in 24-hour format so it does not shift to mm:ss when hrs are zero

•

Make the set TOD packet so it will still send when the same TOD is set in

Version 1.0.2
•

Release Date: 12 January 2000

Added output tables for BB-2031_PLF and BB-2031_FPL, these tables were added to
codes 1101 and 1102 and replaced the BB-3000 output on address 13

Version 1.0.3

Release Date: 21 January 2000

•

Made change to RAM test in production test

•

Added output tables for a BB-2031, these tables were added to codes 2101 and 2111
in volleyball and codes 3101 & 3102 in wrestling and replaced the BB-3000 output on
address 13

Version 1.0.4

Release Date: 7 February 2000

•

Revised wrestling advantage time to not start with clock start if the advantage clock
was previously stopped

•

Added flashing of player stats in basketball and volleyball

•

Removed the delete players option in home and guest roster for basketball and
volleyball

•

Removed the edit settings question at power up

•

Removed the new game question when the code entered is the same as the previous
code that was used

•

Changed menu so that arrow keys will wrap around back to the start of the menu
items

•

Moved the switch output selection to the end of the settings function

•

Revised the player edit function in basketball and volleyball to exit the routine when
 is pressed

Introduction

3

Version 1.0.5
•

Track sport added

•

Test code 0001 added

•

Set TOD to 12:00 when start up so operators will set new time

•

Added caption control to basketball, volleyball, football, wrestling, and hockey

•

Added codes for the 2500 series basketball boards

•

Added previous game scores to volleyball for display on the 2500 series basketball
board

•

Added player-fouls-points (PLY FL PTS) captions for the 3000 and 2500 series
basketball boards. The captions will be added to basketball, hockey, volleyball,
wrestling, and football (arena)

•

Changed player rosters to not allow duplicate numbers to be entered

•

Changed individual substitution and mass substitution to allow add of player
number to roster if not found

•

Changed the LCD in basketball to display the shot time

•

Added team fouls –1 function in basketball

•

Removed the no AC power warning message at power up

•

Added flashing of player number in basketball and volleyball

Version 1.0.6

Release Date: 17 March 2000

•

Added segment timer program

•

Added lacrosse code

•

Changed menu in each sport to include “display menu” subroutine

Version 1.1.0

4

Release Date: 7 March 2000

Release Date: 2 May 2000

•

Added pitch and speed code 5500 for Jugs and Stalker guns

•

Added tennis code 220 for standard tennis board

•

Added a scoreboard blank feature to the display menu

•

Added blank capability to the remainder of scoreboard digits in the TOD menu for
outdoor applications
Introduction

•

The time out timer is blanked and the RTD sent when the timer is stopped

•

Formatted the specific TOD RTD item numbers as hh:mm:ss

•

Add PLR F PTS captions team name message center (TNMC) for the BB-3000 series
scoreboard

•

Made the captions 1 and 2 control work on the sports of basketball, hockey,
volleyball, wrestling, and football on column 3 of address 220

•

Added auto increment to period when the period time set is used and the clock value
was at 0:00

•

Added auto increment of inning to baseball and the ability to turn the auto
increment on/off

•

When the inning is incremented it also sets the current team score to 0 if blank and
changes the at bat indicator

Version 1.1.1

Release Date: 10 May 2000

•

Corrected error in BB-2041 driver 2 driver table in basketball player-foul-points,
points x10 column 7. This error will only be found in release 1.1.0

•

Added scoreboard test program, code 0002

Version 1.2.0

Release Date: 01 August 2000

•

Added event counter codes 371-376

•

Added judo codes 281 and 284

•

Added karate codes 282 and 285

•

Added tae kwon do codes 283 and 286

•

Added multi-purpose timer code 100

•

Added dedicated segment timer code 99

•

Added auto racing codes 301, 333, 336, 401, 433, 995

•

Added a configurable warning time to segment timer program

•

Added clock console codes in basketball (1000) and football (6000)

•

Added shots-on-goal console code in hockey (4000)

Introduction

5

•

Fixed “ball on” function to exit when a key was pressed after an illegal key value

•

Fixed problem with hockey shots-on-goal and home player 1 penalty number

•

Fixed dimming problem causing scoreboard to blank when dim level was changed

•

Added momentary relay closure setting for analog clock operation in soccer codes

•

Added a RTD heartbeat clock packet, changed routine to update clock RTD once per
second when counting down

•

Modified routines to accept a clear key press and blank scoreboard data

•

Modified blank shot setting routine to update shot clock when setting was changed

•

Fixed basketball initialize routine to copy shot clock default on a new game and not
on a resume

•

Added a second configurable timer reset switch in basketball and football

•

Modified set play clock and set shot clock functions to start over at the first step
when a new key was pressed

•

Added H-413 shots-on-goal scoreboard to all hockey codes

•

Modified roster functions to send only changed RTD item fields

•

Added codes 1401 and 1402 to basketball program and codes 2401, 2402 to volleyball

•

Modified initialize routine to leave the TOD clock at its preset value when a new
game is selected

Version 1.2.1

•

Corrected team name centering problem with odd length team names being off by
one column

•

Changed the multi purpose timer default dimming level to 0 (full brightness)

•

Shifted characters r and y were reduced to 3 columns for TNMCs

•

Added a manual horn button function to test code 0001

Version 1.3.0

6

Release Date: 30 August 2000

Release Date: 24 October 2000

•

Modified multi-purpose timer to have TOD display on a 6 digit clock output

•

Changed initialize in basketball so heartbeat packet will be sent
Introduction

•

Modified pitch and speed routines to accept a faster pitch speed within 2 seconds of
first reading

•

Modified auto racing code to use driver name from ChronX for RTD display
purposes

•

Made several changes to RTD output table

•

Modified sport menus to have the display dim selection in the main menu after New
Code

Version 1.3.1

Release Date: 10 January 2001

•

Changed auto racing to ignore any commas in alpha fields (field separators)

•

Add power-on caption control to address 23,24,25 in football to column 16 of each
for code 6611

•

Change auto racing to default to show current lap in manual codes

•

Change auto racing to display lap in race mode and display lap time in qualify mode

•

Change test code to fix the problem of manual horn key causing the rotating column
and row to stop

•

Add output for TI-218 in basketball at address 2

•

Fix wrestling adv time problem of switching adv indicator when adv time reaches
the main clock period time setting

•

Modify wrestling scoreboard test to display red and green on LCD instead of home
and guest

•

Fix wrestling new game problem of not turning off the adv time clock so when the
main clock is started, the adv time starts counting down

•

Correct the problem of the period end time not being saved on a loss of power and
then resume game

Version 1.4.0

Release Date: 2 February 2001

•

Fixed the scoreboard test program for auto racing boards to not blank the clock
section

•

Added a scoreboard test function for MS-2001 when code 02 is entered without a
previous sport code

Introduction

7

•

Added a new code 6402 for football on hockey 2024 boards

•

Changed auto racing pylon scoreboard outputs for pos 41-45 to use the correct RTD
item numbers and display the correct information

Version 1.4.1

•

Add outputs for a new MS-2009 to soccer and to football

•

Add basketball and hockey codes for use at the American Airlines Center in Dallas
codes 9101 (basketball) and 9401 (hockey)

•

Add outputs for SO-2008 to soccer (Code 7601) and football (code 6601) and
hockey/lacrosse (code 4601)

•

Add x100 team score segments to hockey boards with address 71 to basketball codes
1401 and 1402 and to hockey codes 4401 and 4402 for testing purpose

Version 1.4.2

Release Date: 12 April 2001

•

Added a menu option to baseball to allow a 2 digit time or at bat to be displayed in
the at bat section of the output. This is done for a new model of scoreboard BA-2005

•

Added a minimum speed selection for radar gun on pitch and speed

•

Corrected problem with speed of pitch not working with Stalker® radar gun when
gun is set for whole digit and no tenths

•

Added a medical timer so it will count beyond the end of a period

•

Fixed judo osaekomi timer so it will count beyond the end of a period

•

Added address 22 for 6 digit time on the TI-2006 to the multi-purpose timer

•

Added an output for SO-1830, 1930 to code 4601 hockey/lacrosse for use in lacrosse
that will show period on the home penalty digit

Version 1.4.3

8

Release Date: 1 March 2001

Release Date: 8 June 2001

•

Added a new address 17 for Tuff Sport™ basketball boards to codes for basketball,
volleyball, wrestling, hockey, and football

•

Added 16 column caption on address 223 for Kemper Arena to codes 1103, 2103,
3103, 4103 and 6103

•

Fixed the judo medical timer so if set to time of 0:00 would disable the medical timer
when the medical exam key is pressed
Introduction

•

Added to judo to show the score, penalty, and medical status on the second line of
the LCD

•

Added pitch count keys to pitch and speed code

Version 1.4.4

Release Date: 26 July 2001

•

Added alternative driver tables for reverse of white-blue to judo, karate, tae kwon
do, at driver address 109,110,111

•

Change radio channel limit to 75 channels

•

Added address 15,16 to football code 6611

•

Added the select frame # response to DSTI (to indicate sport) for hockey, soccer,
baseball, and wrestling

Version 1.5.0

Release Date: 26 October 2001

•

Made hockey penalty times to shift up to the top position on the scoreboard

•

Changed to allow adjustment of penalty times after setting the main clock

•

Added SO-1624 address 13,14 to hockey code 4601

•

Add team name address 221 to code 8604 for track

•

Moved the at bat for baseball on FB-1630/SO-1830 from 5,6 to 3,4

•

Changed segment timer so it can count up

•

Changed the displays for American Airlines to show full timeouts on the main
scoreboard and full-partial timeouts on the auxiliary displays

•

Changed the main hockey console so it would keep the SOG keys active after data is
received from the SOG console

•

Added a second H-segment for colons on penalty time to the sec 1 digit, in hockey
for FP-25 displays

•

Changed the DSTI interface so it would not send back data it received but only
update the scoreboards

•

Added boxing code 291 for BB-3000 scoreboards

•

Added the driver data for a BA-2010 to the BA-5 driver at address 61

•

Added the driver data for FB-2005 to FB-8 driver at address 11

Introduction

9

•

Added 32 column captions for BB-3000 boards for TMFLS/TOL at address 225

•

Changed delete of penalty time in hockey so it will scroll penalty time 2 up instead
of bringing in time from penalty time 3

Version 1.5.1

Release Date: 27 December 2001

•

Fixed the timeout indicators so they will clear when the main clock is started

•

Changed the timeout function so it will turn on the indicator but not the timeout
time when the configured time is set to zero

•

Fixed the track code running time output address 22 so the colon will light when the
colon is on in the RTD data

•

Added address 2 to all auto racing codes for LC230 and LC218 displays (except lane
timer 303)

•

Default segment timer for 5 minutes

Version 1.5.2
Release Date: 6 March 2002
• Added shot clock timing to hockey/lacrosse

•

Added pen/fouls display selection in addition to SOG and saves in soccer

•

Added code 4499 for paint ball that uses hockey insert but has 3 penalty times that
count

•

In basketball, added team fouls display on line 6 of player fouls stats and made its
display configurable

•

Added a fixed width font conversion for auto racing in a new code (334)

•

Added code 5099 for the strikeout count controller

Version 1.5.3
Release Date: 10 April 2002
• Made rodeo timer able to edit now up time in timed events mode without adjusting
each of the individual timers

10

•

Corrected ½ point scoring setting in rodeo at power up, setting was opposite of what
it said

•

Change the scoreboard ON/OFF key function in rodeo so the scoreboard
automatically turns back on at the start of the next competitor or at reset

•

Added arena football code 9601 to American Airlines
Introduction

•

Added full and partial timeouts to BB-2046

•

Switched SOG and SAVES position on the BB-2046 as requested (by scoreboard
design)

•

Resume game does not restore TOD clock correctly in hockey. Made all sports go to
game clock on a new game or resume

•

Added code 555 for Compulink interface for drag racing displays

Version 1.5.4
Release Date: 2 May 2002
• Made the player number entry for fouls and points (in basketball) skip past the timer
delay if a key is pressed before it expires

•

Adjust the dimming levels to add dim levels of 1-9

•

Added codes for Resch Center

•

Add new promo keys for the strikeout console used at Shea Stadium

•

Added code 5599 for the sport of cricket

•

Added sending of code number, model, and version number for TrueTime support.
It was added to the multidrop and RTD outputs

•

Made boxing not count a time of 0 in the interval time. An interval time of 0 is
treated as if there were no automatic timing and stops at the next round

•

Added codes for SUNY at Cortland 9403, 9603, 9703

•

Added hustle board stats to basketball codes 1103, 1104, 1105. This is on address 35
and includes rebounds, blocks, assists, steals

•

Added code 7611 to soccer for 4 column/digit clocks

Version 1.5.5
Release Date: 23 October 2002
• Made football code 6103 blank the total yards if rushing and passing yards are blank

•

Added a segment for power-on/sponsor panel in basketball on address 35 segment
11-H and to address 17 segment 15-H

•

Fixed the lock-up problem in receive of stats in basketball and hockey

•

Made baseball so it could shift inning scores by 9

•

Made wrestling show team score and match score based on the last score accessed

Introduction

11

•

Added general stats to football for address 28 in code 6611 for the Fargodome

•

Changed the default mode to race mode in auto racing

•

Made codes 6000 and 1000 update the time on the display after doing a set time

•

Added code 4701 and made it identical to code 4601. Made code 4601 to work for
football boards

•

Added code 4602 and 4702 to have 3 penalty timers counting for lacrosse

•

Fixed the problem with mass-sub in volleyball

•

Added down labels 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th to football

•

Fixed the problem of team fouls that are displayed on the 6th line of a stats panel
being blanked by player stats functions

•

Changed the SO-2031 soccer output to show fouls instead of penalties

•

Modified scoreboards output so the driver packets are made before sending to
lighten the load on interrupt overhead. Also made it so it only sends the data up to
the point where the driver data has not changed

Version 1.5.8
Release Date: 03 December 2002
• Corrected a problem that caused the broadcast blank data not to be sent on power up

•

Corrected a problem with the team name message centers being sent the wrong
amount of data on a refresh packet

•

Corrected the problem with test code 0001, blank display, and scoreboard address
test so they are all now working correctly

Version 2.0.0
Release Date: 15 January 2003
• Added Water Polo code 4498

12

•

Added address 17 to hockey codes 4401,4402 and to basketball codes 1401,1402

•

Added scores by quarter for basketball

•

Added scores by quarter for football

•

Made rushing and passing yards work with negative numbers

•

Fixed the receive of MDP from clock console in football and hockey

•

Removed period key from boxing

•

Made colon for adv time in wrestling test code blank
Introduction

•

Added shot clock test to water polo and hockey

•

Made increment of period in set time so it would blank the quarter score if scoring
by quarter

•

Added time-outs-left (TOL) to column 15 of the rushing/passing stats boards in
football

•

Added segment E (col 8) to the colon of address 22 for the multi-purpose timer

•

Added broadcast group and channel selection for the Gen IV radios

Version 2.0.1
Release Date: 12 May 2003
• Added checks in the verify configuration that checks to see that all clock precision
settings are valid

•

Added address 17 to 6402 for arena football

•

Added address 17 to code 220 for tennis

•

Added a wrestling code to the custom codes for the Resch Center

•

Added 2 digit time to address 61 (columns 12,13) in code 5501 for baseball for the
model BA-2012

•

Fixed the radio channel select to work for Gen IV radios after exit from the
production test

•

Changed receive of DakStats® information so there is not a scoreboard update done
unless the information has changed from previous data

•

Added address 223 for ply/fl/pts to 4401 and 4402 and also to volleyball

•

Fixed the shot clock when not set for blanking so it will count down when shot time
is less than the game time

•

Added code 221 for tennis models TN-2010 and TN-2011

Version 2.0.2 Release Date: 29 May 2003
• Added period/quarter/game caption to custom codes 9102, 9202, 9302, 9402, 9602

•

Added an option to rodeo code 8000 in scored events to have the horn still sound
after the horn time period after the timer has been stopped

•

Added a football mode to the MS-2009 and MS-2118 on address 71,72,73

Version 2.0.5
Release Date: 25 August 2003
• Added code 556 for C33 interface
Introduction

13

•

Added code 399 for rowing controller

•

Added weight class with H/G points for win on player foul stat panels to wrestling

•

Added code 8610 for 8-lane track timing

•

Added configuration to soccer for display of TOL or penalty

•

Changed hockey so penalty does not turn off opposite penalty

•

Added a second segment for colon on penalty time to address 29, 30, 31, 32 in code
4104

•

Added address 11 to codes 9105, 9405, 9205

•

Changed auto racing to fix lockup problem when odd numbered start position is set
in variable position pylon

Version 2.0.6
Release Date: 20 November 2003
• Changed segment timer so it sends the segment number out on RTD output

•

Fixed wrestling code 3304 so the segment number will show on match score

•

Added captions for PERIOD/QUARTER/GAME to codes 9105,9405,9205, & 9605

•

Added advantage time to foul/points on address 14 for code 3102

•

Added the ability to show at bat/time on the AT BAT digits on a BA-3718

•

Added address 71 to code 7711 for soccer

•

Set football default to auto horn off

•

Fixed auto racing codes so the scoreboard does not stop updating

Version 2.0.7
Release Date: 30 March 2004
• Added a mode for baseball on the SO-2008

14

•

Added team name captions for MS-2009

•

Fixed the test code for soccer so it will test the penalty/TOL section

•

Added flashing of a player fouls and points when they are received from the DSTI

•

Added generic stats for basketball so DSTI can display three points shots

•

If the weight classes are turned off in wrestling, made the stat panels go blank

Introduction

•

Fixed team fouls on stats panels for line 6, guest side did not show on power up or
resume game

•

Added a key to basketball to clear team fouls

•

Added the period text messages and period descriptions

•

Added team name captions for FB-2002 for football, soccer, and lacrosse

•

Added speed-of-pitch indicators for mild, medium, and hot levels

•

Added circle K indicators to speed-of-pitch and also to promo display codes

•

Added match elapsed time to wrestling, and show it and time of day on reset of a
match

•

Added a code to basketball (code 1301) to run the WR-2024 board

•

Added a code to volleyball (code 2301) to run the WR-2024 board

•

Added a code to gymnastics (code 0015) to run on the WR-2024 board

•

Added a segment timer for home/guest partial team fouls on relay driver at address
220

•

Added a code (4102) for handball/lacrosse for counting three penalty times on
basketball boards

•

Fixed RTD text field for Guest Penalty from Possess to Penalty

Version 2.0.8
Release Date: 16 August 2004
• Added address 14 to hockey codes for hockey boards and basketball codes for
hockey boards
•

Added a two second delay after stop of the blood/injury time before it goes back to
match time

•

Added a new code(6612) for four col/digit on football

•

Added a new address for football (Address 18) for the FB-2007

•

Made a new code (code 7702) for soccer to count over 99 minutes for European
market

•

Fixed basketball receive of generic stats from DSTI

•

Added partial time-outs display segments on address 23 and 25 in basketball

•

Fixed code 300 so the lap time shows on the old CH14-xx displays

Introduction

15

•

Added custom code 9606 for the San Francisco 49ers football board

•

Added code 9100 for BB-2139 basketball board with 12 electronic player name
captions

•

Added period digit to soccer for a new SO-2013 board to address 14 (uses addresses
13 and 14) and also to hockey/lacrosse address 14

•

Added power-on caption segments to the BB stats addresses 36 and 37

•

Added save of baseball/basketball RTD to GIP when exit of stats mode is done. This
allows for recovery of current game data if stats feed is lost

Version 2.0.9
Release Date: 25 October 2004
• Added captions for H/G WEIGHT to wrestling and set correct captions for codes
3101 to 3105
•

Fixed the clear stats function in volleyball so it updates after the clear and does not
take players out of the game

•

Changed the score of +1, +3, +6 in football so that it will blank ball on, down, to go

•

Added team name abbreviations (address 222) for the main sports

•

Fixed electronic team name captions for USD by adding a code for basketball,
football, and volleyball that supported an outdoor controller that shifts left to right

•

Fixed the tennis team name captions top and bottom so the length can be set

•

Added custom code (9108) for Brigham Young University for a retrofit of their old
board

Version 2.1.0
Release Date: 02 February 2005
• Added a code for running wrestling on a hockey and basketball board combo,
(H-2104, BB-2124) with the codes 3401 and 3402

16

•

Added a code for field hockey that would do 3 penalty timers for H-2104, on code
4603,4703

•

Corrected the message in baseball menu from error position on-off, to position

•

Added a period text description code for two console operation in basketball and
football

•

Added two new driver addresses with three penalty timers in water polo

•

Fixed problem in wrestling with Reset Match key, any cold key would lock it up for
several key strokes

•

Changed to add the weight class scores to get the total team score for the meet, if
using weight classes
Introduction

•

Added player names to volleyball and penalty times to hockey/handball for the
European board codes 9200 and 9400. Added code 9409 for handball with three
penalty times

•

Added display codes D7 and D8 to the compulink interface (code 555) for left and
right KPH

Version 2.1.1
Release Date: 10 March 2005
• Added a code for running wrestling on a hockey and basketball board combo,
(H-2104, BB-2124) with the codes 3401 and 3402
•

Added error x10 digits for home and guest to baseball on address 68 and 69

•

Changed water polo so the horn command bit will be sent with the shot clock horn

•

Added address 23,24,25,26 to codes 1401, 4401, 3401, 2401 and 6402

•

Added extra addresses to volleyball, football, and soccer for All Sport CG

Version 2.1.2
Release Date: 15 May 2005
• Added PLY/FL/PTS captions (addr 223) to the codes 9100,9200 of basketball and
volleyball
•

Added quarter score outputs for football to address 29 of code 6611

•

Fixed 8-lane track output to show lane # on address 12, it had the wrong rtd item #

•

Added a time into period for hockey to be shown when the stop key is pressed and
when arrow keys are pressed

Version 2.1.7

Release Date: 24 March 2006

•

Added a warning time horn for a partial timeout using the full timeout warning time

•

Made a menu option to select if the team score is shown on team score/adv time
section of the matside board

•

Added new address to baseball for a 2 driver inning board, model BA-2022

•

Changed the Mass Sub function in basketball so that it will not exit if you answer NO
to the question of add player

•

Fixed the Wrestling advantage time edit so if the advantage time is set to 0:00 for one
team and then started for the other team it will count correctly

•

Added custom code 0091 to replace an existing 2400 time of day console

•

Added support for receive of DSTI data in Hockey code

Introduction

17

•

Changed baseball code to clear ball, strike, outs at top and bottom of inning, and
clear of batter and average

•

Added a key to clear the batter number and batter average

•

Changed entering of average in baseball, so the value is padded with leading 0’s

•

Added recovery time keys to wrestling

•

Changed wrestling so the blood/injury times remain on the display until a key is
pressed

Version 2.1.8
•

Added address for FB-2007 to soccer , football and baseball

•

Fixed speed pitch so the stalker sport gun will work

•

Added a team name caption for PERIOD/HALF to soccer codes, for Atlanta.

•

Fixed problem with team name edit in tennis for the second name

•

Made baseball auto increment of innings update the period text as well

•

Made the outs +1 key clear ball, strike, batter and average when it switches sides

Version 2.1.9

Release Date 09 August 2006

•

Fixed a problem with some consoles that will not run test code 0000 in production

•

2. Added address 24 and 25 to code 6604 and 7604

•

3. Added possession indicators (full col) to address 16 in football codes

Version 2.2.0

18

Release Date 26 May 2006

Release Date 08 January 2007

•

Changed code 9101 to make the dash on full and partial timeouts to always be on

•

Also added team abbrev to the code, address 222

•

Added a code 9111 for Georgia Dome

•

Added a QUARTER caption for football in code 6601, to match the HALF caption in
soccer

•

Added a countdown timer code 370 that has an output with days and time (with
tenths of sec)

Introduction

•

Added captions for baseball codes 5601 and 5602 to match the captions in football
and soccer on address 226

•

Added a separate warning time for the partial time outs in basketball

•

Fixed the advantage time in wrestling to update the home and guest advantage areas
after an edit. Also fixed the adv time when it was edited to blank or zero so it would
count right, it was counting almost 2 sec before it went to 1

Version 2.2.1

Release Date: 23 May 2007

•

Changed the way speed pitch data is read. There was a problem if radar guns were
switched that the next speed would be missed

•

Fixed the half TNMC caption in soccer codes, it was not correctly positioned

•

Added address 19 for the new FB-2018 and SO-2018 boards to football, soccer,
hockey, baseball, and track

•

Added pitch count output to address 3 and to H/E digits on address 64, 65, 67

Version 2.2.2

Release Date: 21 June 2007

•

Fixed the scoreboard test for baseball HE digits after pitch count was added to these
digits in the last version

•

Added custom codes for Madison Square Garden 9112, 9412, 9901

•

Added a selection for showing laps-to-go in the autorace code 333

•

Added an output (addr 10) for 6 digit time displays in autoracing

•

Added an alt_seg_rtd to football, basketball, and hockey, for the segment # to show
on shot/play clock digits

•

Changed the autorace function getDatCarNum to set the car # blank if it gets a space
or something other than a number

Version 2.2.3

Release Date: 23 Aug 2007

•

Fixed so the code, model, and version number are sent when a new code or resume
code is done.

•

Fixed wrestling weight classes in position 1 and 2 to display correctly when set for a
5 line display and when selected for showing lines 13 and 14.

•

Added code for Australian football and cricket. Code 6699-FB and 5699-CR.

Introduction

19

20

•

Fixed a bug in edit of quarter scores in football and basketball. Locks up if a cold key
is pressed when waiting for quarter # entry.

•

Changed baseball to show time/atbat/pitch on time digits and show
HE/atbat/pitch on the HE digits.

•

Added TSI interface code 558 to drag race timing codes.

Introduction

Section 2:
2.1

Basic Operation

Console Operation
The console face consists of a 2-line x 16-character liquid crystal display (LED), sport specific
insert, numeric keypad, operation keys, main clock keys, and LEDs for status. In most cases,
the top line of the LCD shows the main clock time, direction the clock is counting, and when
the main horn is sounding. Generally, the bottom line of the LCD shows the HOME and
GUEST team scores.
Throughout the manual the names or letters of keys on the keyboard are enclosed in arrows
(such as ). The standard fixed keys and functions on the right side of the console are
explained in Section 2.6. All of the keys that pertain to a specific sport code insert are
explained in detail in the section of the manual for that specific sport.
In addition, Quick References and Menu Flowcharts for the Standard Keys and many of the
individual sports are provided in Appendix D.

2.2

Sport Inserts
Sports inserts are used to allow a single console to control multiple sports. Select the proper
insert from the chart below and slide it into the insert opening on the left side of the console
until it stops. To remove a sport insert, pull on the tab that extends from the left side of the
console. The insert will easily slide out.
If an insert is lost or damaged, a copy of the insert drawing, located at the end of each
section, can be used until a replacement can be ordered.
Use the labels provided in Appendix B to attach the correct code number to each sport insert.
Write the code number in the following table and in the space provided in the section of this
manual for that sport.
If you do not know the code number for your scoreboard, refer to Appendix B in this
manual. If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard, refer to the Installation
and Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard.
Sport

Insert Number

Baseball

LL-2438

Basketball

LL-2433

Boxing

0G-96892

Cricket

0G-164973

Event Counter

0G-58047

Football

LL-2437

Hockey

LL-2436

Number Code

(Continued on next page)

Basic Operations

21

(Continued form previous page)

Sport

2.3

Insert Number

Judo

0G-96891, 0G-98376

Karate

0G-96890, 0G-98374

Pitch and Speed

LL-2482

Segment Timer

LL-2475

Soccer

LL-2440

Strikeout

0G-163409

Tae kwon do

0G-96889, 0G-98375

Tennis

LL-2483

Track

LL-2439

Team Name (TNMC)

LL-2441

Volleyball

LL-2434

Water Polo

0G-178439

Wrestling

LL-2435

Number Code

Not applicable

Sport Insert Operation Concepts
A sport insert identifies the actions keys required in the normal course of operation for that
specific sport. In most cases, pressing a key immediately changes the scoreboard. Sometimes
a sequence of keys must be pressed before a change is noticed on the scoreboard. Keys that
require entry of additional information are marked by a dot. This additional information
usually is a number followed by the  key.
Keys with arrows activate an indicator (possession, bonus, etc.) on the scoreboard. The
direction of the arrow selects the appropriate team (home or guest).
Some keys have a +1, +2 or +3. By pressing one of these keys once, the corresponding field
on the scoreboard (such as team score or period) increments (increases) by the amount
printed on the key. A key with a -1 decrements (decreases) by one and a key with a +1
increments (increases) by one.
On most inserts, certain keys have been grouped together under the heading Home or Guest.
These keys are team keys and work the same for both teams. They affect the statistics for that
one team. Keys not under one of these headings are game keys. They are general keys for
the progress of the game (such as period or quarter). Other keys have been blocked together
to emphasize that these keys work together.

22

Basic Operations

2.4

Start Up
When the LCD Display is as shown, the following actions may be selected.
LCD Display

AS-5000 v1.0.0
ED-xxxxx

Action
The console performs a self-test when it is
powered on. During the self-test, a message
displays the version of the standard software
loaded in the console.
V = version number and revision number
ED = standard software number

PREV CODE nnnn
RESUME GAME?
nnnn = last code selected

When the self-test completes, a prompt displays
the code number for the last game played. This is
useful when power to the console is lost during a
game.
Press  to resume the last game stored in
memory. The console is now ready for game
operation.
Press  to start a new game or change to a
different sport. The console will prompt for a new
code number as shown below.

SELECT CODE
CODE nnnn
nnnn = last code selected

The SELECT CODE prompt allows you to accept
the last code selected (displayed on the second
line) or enter a new code.
To accept the code shown press .
To select a new sport code:
1. Get the code number from the sport insert or
the section of the manual for that sport.
2. Use the number keys to enter the new fourdigit code. Press .
(Continued on next page)

Basic Operations

23

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

Radio chan nn
Enter or change
nn = last radio channel used

Action
If a new code is selected, and the radio option is
installed, the console prompts for a channel.
When Resume Game is used the last channel
selected is used.
Press  to accept the channel number or
enter a new channel number.
Refer to Section 2.5 for more information.

2.5

Setting Radio Channels
Reference Drawings:
Channel Selection; Single Control Console, Gen IV ............................. Drawing A-180566
Channel Selection; Single Broadcast Group; Gen IV............................ Drawing A-180922
Channel Selection; Multiple Broadcast Group, Gen IV ......................... Drawing A-180923
The radio receiver units used in the scoreboards have a channel-setting switch that can be set
from 1 through 8 (channels 0, and 9-15 are not used). A radio receiver will accept data from a
console transmitter with the same channel (and broadcast group) setting. The drawings,
listed above show how to install the All Sport 1600 in order to operate one scoreboard or
multiple scoreboards at a time.
The receivers also have a jumper that can be used to select broadcast group 1, 2, 3 or 4. A
“Broadcast Group” defines a group of radio receivers that in addition to “listening” to the
channel selected on the channel switch will also “listen” for data broadcast on their broadcast
channel. There are four broadcast groups available.
In this type of system, the receiver unit at the scoreboard must have the channel switch set to
a specific channel. The operator must know which channel the board is set on. The operator
must then enter the specific channel during console startup when prompted to do so.

24

Basic Operations

Each radio receiver will accept data sent from the broadcast channel of its respective
broadcast group. This is selected by setting the transmitter radio (from the console) to the
respective broadcast group (either 1, 2, 3 or 4). Every radio receiver will also accept data sent
from the “Master Broadcast” channel. This is selected when a transmitter (console) radio is
set to Broadcast Group 0 (BCAST 0) and Channel 0.
The channel number and broadcast group set on the radio installed in each scoreboard can be
verified by cycling power to the scoreboard. Approximately seven seconds after power up,
the scoreboard will show the current channel in the scoreboard clock digits. A CXX will first
be shown where XX is the current radio channel number. This will be followed by BXCY
where X is the current broadcast group and Y is the current channel number within this
broadcast group.
There are three different radio scenarios that can be accommodated.
1.

Single Controller System:
In a single controller system, all radio receivers and all scoreboards receive signal
from the same All Sport console at all times. The default channel and broadcast
group settings on the receiver are not typically modified. An example of this type of
system is a typical high school football installation.

2.

Multiple Controller System w/Single Broadcast Group:
In a multiple controller system with a single broadcast group, there are additional
All Sport Controllers for controlling multiple scoreboards. There is never a scenario
where groups of scoreboards that were run by individual controllers need to be run
by a single controller. An example of this type of system is a softball complex with
multiple fields and a scoreboard on each field.

3.

Multiple Controller w/Multiple Broadcast Groups:
In a Multiple controller with Multiple Broadcast (Split Court Operation) system,
there are additional All Sport Controllers that can control multiple scoreboards. The
broadcast group jumper is used to select broadcast group 1, 2, 3, or 4. By changing
All Sport settings to a Broadcast address, a single All Sport Controller can control all
scoreboards or specific groups of scoreboards (defined by the broadcast group). One
example of this scenario is split court operation in basketball installations, where
scoreboards are used to score multiple games at once, but can be grouped together to
show one game if necessary. Refer to the drawings listed on the previous page for
more information.

The All Sport Console will automatically detect when a radio transmitter is installed and will
prompt the user for transmitter settings.
The All Sport Console will show the current transmitter radio status on the LCD when a code
is entered. The following table describes broadcast group and channel settings.

Basic Operations

25

LCD Display

RADIO SETTINGS
BCAST Y CHAN XX
The LCD will toggle
these screens

Action
The LCD shows the current radio settings along
with a prompt to accept or modify these values.
If the radio settings are correct press 
If these values are incorrect press 
If  is pressed to modify the radio settings
the LCD at the left is shown, allowing edit of the
Channel or Broadcast group setting.
(Continued on next page)

26

Basic Operations

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

Enter to accept
clear to modify
The bottom line shows the
current setting

Bcast group 1
radio chan 01
The default setting is
Broadcast 1
Channel 1

Action
Edit the Broadcast Setting. Use the number keys to
enter the desired broadcast group and press
 to accept.
The asterisk will move to the channel setting. Use
the number keys to edit this value and press
 to accept. Edit the channel number to the
desired value and press  to accept.
Broadcast
Group

Channel
Setting

0

0
0

1
1-8

0
2
1-4

0
3
1-8

0
4
1-4

Basic Operations

Control
Scoreboards
All
Scoreboards
All in BCAST
Group 1
Set to
corresponding
BCAST 1
Channel
All in BCAST
Group 2
Set to
Corresponding
BCAST 2
Channel
All in BCAST
Group 3
Set to
corresponding
BCAST 3
Channel
All in BCAST
Group 4
Set to
corresponding
BCAST 4
Channel

27

Single Controller Systems Channel Setting
Typically all single controller systems will use the default setting BCAST = 1, CHAN = 1. All
radio receivers must be set with a switch setting of 1 with the Broadcast 1 (BCAST 1) jumper
set.
If you suspect interference from a nearby Daktronics system, press  at the
“RADIO SETTINGS” prompt to change the channel number.
Typically all multiple controller systems will use channel 1 for the first controller. All other
controllers will use sequential channel settings (2-8). The following table describes broadcast
channel and channel settings.
LCD Display

Action

RADIO SETTINGS
BCAST Y CHAN XX

The LCD shows the current radio settings along
with a prompt to accept or modify these values.

The LCD will toggle these
screens.

If the radio settings are correct press 
If these values are incorrect press 

bcast group 1
radio chan 01

If  is pressed to modify the radio settings
the LCD at the left is shown, allowing edit of the
channel or broadcast group setting.
Edit the broadcast setting. Use the number keys to
enter the desired broadcast group and press
 to accept.

Enter to accept
clear to modify

Broadcast Group Setting
1

The bottom line shows
default settings.

Use this setting for all single controller
systems the asterisk will move to the
channel setting. Use the number keys to
edit this value and press  to
accept. Edit the channel number to the
desired value and press  to
accept.

Channel Setting
1-8

28

Channels that may be used with broadcast
channel 1. The channel switch on the
receiver must match this value and only the
Broadcast 1 (BCAST1) jumper must be
installed.

Basic Operations

Multiple Controller w/Single Broadcast Group Channel Setting
Typically all single controller systems will use Broadcast 1 and Channel 1 for the first
controller and Channels 2-8 for all remaining controllers. All radio receivers must be set with
a switch setting corresponding to the console controlling the scoreboard and a Broadcast 1
(BCAST 1) jumper set.
If you suspect interference from a nearby Daktronics system, press  at the “RADIO
SETTINGS” prompt to change the channel number.
Typically all multiple controller systems will use channel 1 for the first controller. All other
controllers will use sequential channel settings (2-8). The following table describes broadcast
group and channel settings.
LCD Display

RADIO SETTINGS
BCAST Y CHAN XX

Action
The LCD shows the current radio settings along
with a prompt to accept or modify these values.
If the radio settings are correct press .

Enter to accept
Clear to modify
The LCD will toggle
these screens

bcast group 1
radio chan 01
The bottom line shows
default settings.

If these values are incorrect press 
If  is pressed to modify the radio settings
the LCD at the left is shown, allowing edit of the
channel or broadcast group setting.
To edit the broadcast setting, use the number keys
to enter the desired broadcast group and press
 to accept.

Broadcast Group Setting
1-

Use this setting for all multiple controller
with single broadcast group setups. The
asterisk will move to the channel setting.
Use the number keys to edit this value and
press  to accept. Edit the
channel number to the desired value and
press  to accept.

Channel Setting
1-8

Basic Operations

Channels that may be used with broadcast
channel 1. The channel switch on the
receiver must match this value and only the
Broadcast 1 (BCAST1) jumper must be
installed.

29

Multiple Controller w/Multiple Broadcast Systems Channel Setting
Typically all multiple controller systems will use Broadcast Group 1 Channel 1 for the first
controller in Broadcast Group 1 and Broadcast Group 2 Channel 1 for the first controller in
Broadcast Group 2. All other consoles in each group are added sequentially, using channels
2-4.
LCD Display

RADIO SETTINGS
BCAST Y CHAN XX
The LCD will toggle
these screens

Action
The LCD shows the current radio settings along
with a prompt to accept or modify these values.
If the radio settings are correct press .
If these values are incorrect press .

Enter to accept
clear to modify

bcast group 1
Radio Chan 01
The bottom line shows
default settings.

If  is pressed to modify the radio settings
the LCD at the left is shown, allowing edit of the
channel or broadcast group setting.
Edit the broadcast setting. Use the number keys to
enter the desired broadcast group and press
 to accept.
The asterisk will move to the channel setting. Use
the number keys to edit this value and press
 to accept. Edit the channel number to
the desired value and press  to accept.
(Continued on next page)

30

Basic Operations

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

bcast group 1
radio chan 01
The bottom line shows
default settings.

Action

Broadcas
t Group

Channel
Setting

Control
Scoreboards

0

0

All Scoreboards
All in BCAST
Group 1
Set to
corresponding
BCAST 1 Channel
All in BCAST
Group 2
Set to
Corresponding
BCAST 2 Channel
All in BCAST
Group 3
Set to
corresponding
BCAST 3 Channel
All in BCAST
Group 4
Set to
corresponding
BCAST 4 Channel

0
1
1-8

0
2
1-4

0
3
1-8

0
4
1-4

2.6

Standard Keys
The Quick Reference is located in Appendix C. 
Start
 is used to start the main clock. The green LED on the  key is on while the
main clock is running.
Stop
 is used to stop the main clock. The green LED on the  key is off while the
main clock is stopped.

Basic Operations

31

Enter/Yes
The  key has two functions:
•

Completes an action. The asterisk is a reminder that this key is to be pressed when an
asterisk appears on the LCD.

•

Serves as  for input prompts.

Clear/No
The  key has two functions:
•

Clears the LCD of numerical information.

•

Serves as  for input prompts.

Edit
The  key allows the user to select which field on the scoreboard to be edited (such as
team score). After pressing the  key, press one of the increment or decrement keys for
the desired field on the scoreboard. Then simply enter the value you wish to display and
press  to accept.
Menu
The  key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport. The
up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list. The left and right
arrow keys allow the user to enter and exit submenu lists for a specific menu item. Pressing a
key other than , , the arrow keys, or other allowed keys, exists the Menu
function.

32

Basic Operations

Set Main Clock
LCD Display

MAIN CLOCK -SET
CURR mm:ss.t*
mm:ss.t = minutes, seconds,
tenths of a second

Action
After the main clock has been stopped press
 to display the current time of
the main clock.
To change the time enter the desired time on the
number pad and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return
to the game.

MAIN CLOCK -EDIT
PERIOD mm:ss*
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Press  a second time or the
down arrow key to display the configured time for
the main clock period length.
To accept the displayed period length press
.
To decline the selection of the period length press
.
To change the period length and set the main clock
enter the new time in minutes and seconds on the
number pad and press .
Note: Pressing  to select the period time
as the main clock setting will increment the current
period number if the clock value was previously
zero.
Press  twice to clear changes and return
to the game.
(Continued on next page)

Basic Operations

33

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

MAIN CLOCK -EDIT
BREAK mm:ss *
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Action
Press  a third time or the
down arrow key to display the configured time for
break length.
To accept the break length press .
To decline the selection of the break length press
.
To change the break length and set the main clock
enter the new time in minutes and seconds on the
number pad and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return
to the game.

MAIN CLOCK -EDIT
OT mm:ss *
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Press  a fourth time or the
down arrow key to display the configured time for
overtime length.
To accept the overtime length press .
To decline the selection of the overtime length
press .
To change the overtime length and set the main
clock enter the new time in minutes and seconds on
the number pad and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return
to the game.
(Continued on next page)

34

Basic Operations

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

MAIN CLOCK -EDIT
PRE mm:ss *
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Action
Press  a fifth time or the down
arrow key to display the configured time for pregame length.
To accept the pre-game length press .
To decline the selection of the pre-game length
press .
To change the overtime length and set the main
clock enter the new time in minutes and seconds on
the number pad and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return
to the game.

MAIN CLOCK -EDIT
Post mm:ss *
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Press  a sixth time or the
down arrow key to display the configured time for
post-game length.
To accept the post-game length press .
To decline the selection of the post-game length
press .
To change the overtime length and set the main
clock, enter the new time in minutes and seconds
on the number pad and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return
to the game.

Basic Operations

35

Count Up/Down
LCD Display

MAIN CLOCK-DOWN
1-UP, 2-DOWN
up/down = current direction

Action
After the main clock has been stopped, the direction
of the clock can be set.
Press <1> or <2> to select UP or DOWN (default).
Notes: The current direction of the main clock is
shown on the top line of the LCD.
The  function is disabled
while the clock is running.

Auto Horn
LCD Display

AUTO HORN-ON
1-ON, 2-OFF
on/off = current setting

Action
Press <1> or <2> to select ON (default) or OFF. The
amber LED on the  key is on when the Auto
Horn feature is enabled. The LED is off when the Auto
Horn feature is disabled and the horn is in Manual
mode.

Manual Horn
Press  to sound the main horn. The horn sounds as long as the key is pressed. The
horn stops sounding when the key is released.

2.7

Remote Start/Stop Controls
Main Clock Control
The remote Start/Stop control box plugs into J4 on the back of the All Sport 5000 console.
This unit has a rocker switch for Start/Stop and a momentary button for horn. The
Start/Stop switch starts and stops the main timer. The horn button sounds the horn as long
as the button is pressed.

36

Basic Operations

Shot Clock Control
The remote shot clock control box plugs into J7 on the back of the All Sport 5000 console. This
unit has a rocker switch for Start/Stop and a momentary button for reset. When the reset
button is pressed, the shot clock timer is changed to the reset value and stops the timer from
decrementing. The shot clock timer restarts when the reset button is released. In independent
mode, the Start/Stop switch starts and stops the shot clock timer when pushed, but does not
stop when the main clock is stopped. When in synchronized mode, the shot clock timer will
stop and start with the main clock switches only if it is running in the beginning.

2.8

General Multi-Purpose Timer Information
There is no insert for the Multi-Purpose Timer codes. Code 99 is used to operate the multipurpose timer.
Note: The Multi-Purpose Timer is a general timer used for 2, 4 and 6 digit time displays. The
timer will count up or down through hours, minutes, and seconds. The information will shift
on the 2 and 4 digit displays to show the most significant time values as the time changes.
The Multi-Purpose Timer code is also used as a Time-of-Day code by accessing the Time of
Day Menu through the Menu Key. The segment Timer may also be accessed through the
Menu Key.
Standard Keys
The keys that are used by the multi-purpose timer are , , , , ,  and . The key
functions are explained in more detail in Section 2.6.
Accessing the Multi-Purpose Timer
Turn on the console, enter multi-purpose timer code and press .
Press the  key and press the down or up arrows until the following message is
displayed:
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
SELECT TOD?

Basic Operations

Action
Press  to enter the Time of Day Menu.

37

Accessing the Segment Timer
Refer to Section 3 for details on running this function of the All Sport 5000 console.
Turn on the console. Enter the multi-purpose sport code used for the scoreboard in use and
press . A list of sport codes can be found in Appendix B.
Press the  key and press the down or up arrows until the following message is
displayed:
Note: The segment timer function is disabled while the clock is running.
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN enter
display menu?
MENU- Display run
seg timer y/n
Exit game
Are you sure y/n

38

Action
Press  to enter the display menu.

Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.

The console will prompt the user to press  a
second time to enter the segment timer to avoid
accidental exit from the sport program.
Refer to Section 3 for more information on the
segment timer.

Basic Operations

Section 3:

Segment Timer

Sport Insert: LL-2475 (Code 100 is for the dedicated Segment Timer)
The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section. The Quick Reference is located in
Appendix D.
Reference Drawings:
Insert, Segment Timer ........................................................................................Drawing A-129357
Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert. Read Section 2
carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions.
If an insert is lost or damaged, a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be
used until a replacement can be ordered.
If you do not know the code number to enter for your scoreboard, refer to Appendix B in this
manual. If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard, refer to the scoreboard
Installation and Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard.

3.1 Segment Timer Overview
The segment timer is a multi-function timing system and has multiple purposes. The
operation of the segment timer is determined by ninety-nine segments of pre-programmed
length. The segment timer will count down starting at the segment number that is set as First
Segment. When the first segment is completed, the Segment Timer will count the preset
Interval Time and proceed with the next segment. The timer will continue counting segments
until the segment number that is set as Last Segment is complete. It then will reset to the
segment saved as the First Segment and will either begin counting down or wait for the
 key to be pressed depending on the  setting. Refer to Subsection
Auto Stop in this section to set the segment-stopping feature.
The first and last segment values can be used to set up specific practice sessions. For example,
the practice session for one sport could be programmed for five minute segments on segments
1-10 while another might use 10 minute segments on 11-20. Set the first segment and last
segment values to the desired segment numbers for the session and the console will count
down each of the segments in order. It may also be set to either stop on the last segment or
loop back to the first segment segments again based on the  setting.
The segments values will be saved when the console is turned off and will be the same values
regardless of the sport that was used to access the segment timer.

Segment Timer

39

3.2 Accessing Segment Timer
Turn on the console. Enter the multi-purpose sport code used for the scoreboard in use and
press . A list of sport codes can be found in Appendix B.
The segment timer program is accessed through the main menu of each individual sport. The
DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start the segment timer. Press the  key and press
the down or up arrows until the following message is displayed:
Note: The segment timer function is disabled while the clock is running.
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN enter
display menu?
MENU- Display run
seg timer y/n
Exit game
Are you sure y/n

3.3

Action
Press  to enter the display menu.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.

The console will prompt the user to press  a
second time to enter the segment timer to avoid
accidental exit from the sport program.
Refer to Section 3.1 for general segment timer
operation instructions.

Accessing 2-Digit or 6-Digit Display Segment Timer
This code is only used for the two-digit or six-digit displays designed exclusively for
segment timing. Enter code 100 after turning on the All Sport console to access the exclusive
segment timer program. For all other scoreboards, enter the correct scoreboard code and use
 to access the segment timer. Refer to Section 3.2.

40

Baseball Operations

3.4

Segment Timer Keys
Segment No x Time x
The  key is used to edit each segment’s time. Select the segment
to be edited, and enter the time desired. Follow the directions below to accomplish this.
LCD Display

SEGMENT: xx
TIME EDIT
xx = segment number

SEGMENT: xx
TIME EDIT nn:nn
xx = segment number
nn:nn = segment time

Action
Press  to set individual
segment times.
Enter the segment to be edited with the keypad and
press .

Enter the time for the segment with the keypad.
Press  to accept the time and move to
the next segment time.
Press  again to exit the function.
Press the up or down arrow keys to move to the
previous or next segment.

First Segment
This key sets the first segment in a range of segments to run when  is pressed.
LCD Display

FIRST SEGMENT
NN
nn = current first segment

Action
Press  and enter the segment
to be set as the last segment. Press  to
accept the time and exit the function.
The console will be reset to the segment selected
here when the  key is
pressed.

Segment Timer

41

Last Segment
This key sets the last segment in a range of segments to run when  is pressed.
LCD Display

LAST SEGMENT
NN
nn = current last segment

Action
Press  and enter the segment
to be set as the first segment. Press  to
accept the time and exit the function.
After the segment set as the last segment is
completed, the console will automatically reset to
the segment saved as the first segment.

Interval Time
The interval time is the time between each segment. The interval time can be displayed on
the Guest Scoreboard digits using the  key.
LCD Display

INTERVAL TIME:
nn:nn
nn = current setting

Action
Press  to display the current
value of interval time on the bottom line of the LCD.
Edit the value of the interval time and press
.

Display Interval
This setting determines whether the interval count will be displayed on the scoreboard.
LCD Display

DISPLAY INTERVAL
YES OR *NO?
* = current setting

Action
Press  to display the interval time on the
scoreboard. Press  to disable interval time
display. The interval time will be displayed only on
the console if NO is selected.
Notes: Regardless of this setting, the value saved
in interval time will be counted down between
segments. Set the interval time to zero if no interval
between segments is desired.
When the interval time is being displayed, the
segment number on the scoreboard flashes to
indicate that the time displayed is interval time.

42

Baseball Operations

Copy Range
This key sets a range of segments to a specific value.
LCD Display

COPY: nn:nn*
SEG xx to yy
nn:nn = segment value to be
copied
xx = starting segment value
yy = ending segment value

Action
Press  and enter the time
desired. Press  to move to the next field.
The asterisk denotes which field is currently being
edited. When the last segment in the copy range is
set the menu will be exited.
Once completed, all segments from xx to yy
(inclusive) will be set to the value specified by
nn:nn.

Auto Stop
This key is the auto stop function of the console.
Note: To set the console to stop after the last segment in the series is completed, the auto stop
at each segment setting must be set to NO.
LCD Display

AUTO STOP AT
EACH SEG Y/N*
*= current setting

Action
Press to enter this menu. Press
 to set the console to stop after each
segment is completed. Press  to proceed
with the next segment.
Press  to set the console to automatically
begin the next segment when each segment is
completed. The console will prompt for the auto
stop at last segment setting.

AUTO STOP AT
LAST SEG *Y/N
* = current setting

Press  to set the console to stop when the
last segment has been completed. Press  to
set the console to start over at the first segment
when the last segment is completed

Reset to First
Press  to reset the segment number to the segment set as the first
segment. Refer to Subsection First Segment.
Note: The reset to first function is disabled while the clock is running.
Reset Current Segment
Press  to reset the segment time to the value specified by the
current segment. The segment number will remain at the current value.
Segment Timer

43

Current Segment
Press  to increment the segment number.
Default Settings
Write the settings for this installation in the space (Custom) provided.
Setting
First Segment

3.5

Default

Custom
1

Custom
2

Custom
3

Custo
m4

1

Last Segment

99

Warning Timer

00:00

Display Interval

No

Auto Stop on Each
Segment

No

Auto Stop At Last
Segment

Yes

Edit
Current Segment
LCD Display

CURRENT SEGMENT:
EDIT nn
nn = current setting

3.6

Action
Press  to
display the current segment for editing.
Enter the new value for the current segment
number and press .

Menu
The  key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport. The
up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list. Pressing a key other
than , , the arrow keys, and other allowed keys, exit the Menu function.

44

Baseball Operations

New Code
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW CODE?

Action
Press  to begin selection of a new code from
the ENTER CODE prompt.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Warning Time
LCD Display

Warning time
00:00
00:00 = default

Action
Enter the warning time in minutes and seconds and
press.
Enter 00:00 for no warning time.
When the warning time is reached, the segment
number flashes until the main clock reaches zero.

Dim/Bright
LCD Display

MENU- Dimming
level (0-9): nn%
nn = current level
None = bright
90% =
80% =
70% =
60% =
50% =
40% =
30% =
20% =
10% =

Segment Timer

<0>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>

Action
Press <0> through <9> or use the arrow keys <Í>
<Î> to select the intensity for the digits on the
scoreboard.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key <Ð> to scroll to the next
selection.
Note: Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products.
Indoor LED and incandescent products only support
one level of dimming at 50%.

45

Section 4:

Baseball Operations

Sport Insert: LL-2438
The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section. The Team Name insert and Block
Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A. The Quick Reference is located in Appendix D.
Reference Drawings:
Insert, Baseball ...................................................................................................Drawing A-125061
Insert, Team Name .............................................................................................Drawing A-125290
Block Diagrams, A/S5000/3000, Outdoor Sports ...............................................Drawing A-124690
Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and how to use the sport insert. Read
Section 2 carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions.
If an insert is lost or damaged, a copy of the insert drawings are located at the end of this Appendix
B, which can be used until a replacement can be ordered.
Use the labels provided in Appendix B to attach the correct code number label to the sport insert in
the appropriate location. Write the code number in the space provided below.
Write the correct code number here.

If you do not know the code number to enter for your scoreboard, refer to Appendix B in this
manual. If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard, refer to the Installation and
Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard.

4.1

Baseball Keys
Inning +1
Note: If game stats are being received from DSTI the keys on the console will be disabled.
The LCD will display the messages shown below when these keys are pressed.
LCD Display

STATS RECEIVED
Key disabled
EXIT STATS MODE
Y/N?

Baseball Operations

Action
The key disabled message will display for one second
and then the  message will display and
wait for a  or  key. If the  key is
pressed the stats data will be saved in the console and
the console will  mode until another
stats packet is received. This will allow the operator to
enter player stats from the console if the DSTI feed is
lost.

47

LCD Display

INNING-+1
n

Action
Press  to increment the current inning
number.

n = current setting

The LCD shows the new value.

Out +1
The current out number is displayed on the main LCD screen.
Press  to increment the current out number.
Press  to set the out value to 0 when the current value is 3.
Notes:

Refer to Subsection Auto Increment Inning.
The  key automatically increments the inning and
resets the out number to zero when:
• The Auto Inning Increment setting is on.
• The home AT BAT indicator is on.
• The current out number is 3.
The  key turns on the home AT BAT indicator when:
• The Auto Inning Increment setting is on.
• The guest AT BAT indicator is on.
• The current out number is 3.

Batter, Average, Clear Batter/Average
The  and  keys are used to display the uniform number and batting
average of the player currently at bat. Pressing the  key sets
both batter and average to blank.
LCD Display

at bat
nn*

Action
When the  key is pressed enter the number
of the player and press .

nn = current setting

average
nnn*
nnn = current setting

48

When the  key is pressed enter the
batting average of the player and press .
The value will be filled with leading zeros when it is
entered.

Baseball Operations

Ball Count, Strike Count, Clear Count
The  and  keys increment the Ball and Strike digits.
Pressing the  key sets the both counts to zero.
When the Auto Pitch Increment setting is on, the  and
 keys automatically increment the ball and strike pitch count data of
the team that is not at bat (AT BAT indicator off).
If the Ball Count value is 4 when  is pressed the value is blanked out.
Press  a second time to set the value to zero.
If the Strike Count value is 3 when  is pressed the value is blanked out.
Press  a second time to set the value to zero.
Ball and strike pitch count data is not incremented when the  and
 values are incremented to blank or zero.
Hit, Error, Clear Hit/Error
The  and  keys are used to turn on the Hit or Error indicator or digits. On
some scoreboards the  key can also display the player’s position when the Error
Position setting is on. Pressing the  key turns off the Hit and Error
indicators and clears the digits.  is used for an example.
LCD Display

error: ON

Action
Press the  or  key to turn on the Hit or
Error indicator or digits.
This display appears briefly.

error:
position n

When the  key is pressed enter the position
number of the player and press .
This prompt only appears when the Error Position in
Edit Settings is on.

HIT: OFF
error: OFF

Press the  key to turn off the Hit
and Error indicators and clear the digits.
This display appears briefly.

Baseball Operations

49

At Bat
The  keys turn the home and guest at bat indicators on and off. It also clears the
ball, strike, and out count and sets batter and average to blank when the At Bat is turned on.
LCD Display

HOME at bat
ON

Action
Press the home or guest  key to turn on the
at bat indicator for that team.
This display appears briefly.

HOME at bat
OFF

To turn off the possession indicator, press the same
 key a second time or press the opposite
 key.
This display appears briefly.
The current status of the At Bat indicator is shown by
the location of the > on the main LCD screen.

Runs
The function of the  key is determined by the Score By Inning setting. If Score By
Inning is disabled, only the team total is incremented. If Score By Inning is enabled, both the
team total and the total inning scores are incremented.
LCD Display

team RUNS: +1
HOME
nn
nn = current setting

Action
When the Score By Inning setting is disabled:
Press the appropriate  key to
increment the total number of runs for the home or
guest team.
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the
new value for the corresponding team.

runs home +1
inning nn= xx
nn = current inning
xx = inning score

When the Score By Inning setting is enabled:
Press the appropriate  key to
increment the number of runs by inning and the
game total for the home or guest team. The game
total is the sum of all inning scores.
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the
new value for the corresponding team.

50

Baseball Operations

Hits, Errors, Left on Base
The home and guest ,  and  keys are all used to
increment their respective totals.  is used as an example.
LCD Display

hits: +1
HOME

nn

nn = current setting

Action
Press the appropriate key to increment statistics for the
home or guest team.
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new
value for the corresponding team.

Pitch Count, Foul Balls, In Play
The home and guest , , , and  keys are all used to increment the pitch count data of the team
that is not at bat.  is used as an example.
LCD Display

FOUL BALLS: +1
h. pitcher nnn
nnn = current setting

4.2

Action
Press the appropriate key to increment statistics for the pitcher’s team
(home or guest).
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the
corresponding team.

Edit
The  key allows the user to select and edit the following scoreboard fields.
Press  and the key for the home or guest field to be edited.
Inning +1
Note: Do not use   to edit the Score By Inning. Use  .
LCD Display

inning edit
nn
nn = current setting

Baseball Operations

Action
Press   to display the current
setting.
Enter the correct inning number on the number pad and
press .

51

Runs
The way that Runs are edited is determined by the Score By Inning setting. If Score By
Inning is disabled, only the team total can be edited. If Score By Inning is enabled the total by
inning can be edited and the team total is automatically updated.
LCD Display

team RUNS: edit
nn
nn = current setting

Action
When the Score By Inning setting is disabled:
Press  and the appropriate  key to
display the current setting for the home or guest team.
Enter the correct number on the number pad and press
.

edit home runs
inning 01 = nn
nn = current setting

When Inning is enabled:
Press the appropriate  key to display the
number of runs by inning for the home or guest team.
Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll to the inning
to be edited and press .
Enter the correct number of runs on the number pad
and press .
The game total is automatically updated.
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new
value for the corresponding team.

Hits, Errors, Left on Base
The home and guest ,  and keys are all edited in
the same way.  is used as an example.
LCD Display

TEAM hits: edit
HOME
nn
nn = current setting

52

Action
Press  and the appropriate statistic key to
display the current setting.
Enter the correct number on the number pad and press
.

Baseball Operations

4.3

Menu
The  key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport. The
up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list. Pressing a key other
than , , the arrow keys, and other allowed keys exit the Menu function.
The MENU function should be used at the beginning of each new game to edit the Home and
Guest Rosters.
New Game
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW GAME?

Action
Press  to clear all of the program data for the
last game played or the game in progress and begin
running the selected sport.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

New Code
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW CODE?

Action
Press  to begin selection of a new code from
the ENTER CODE prompt.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Baseball Operations

53

Home Roster, Guest Roster
Home Roster and Guest Roster are entered in the same way. Home Roster is used as an
example.
LCD Display

MENU-ROSTER
SELECT HOME

Action
Press  or the right or left arrow key to select
the Home or Guest Roster submenu and show the
first prompt on the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

HOME-TEAM NAME
aaaaaaaaaaaaa*

The TEAM NAME (LL-2441) insert must be
inserted to enter the Team Name Message
Center (TNMC) settings.
The TNMC is updated after each selection is
completed.
Use the COLUMNS, ROWS and STROKE keys to
select the WIDTH, HEIGHT and FONT of the
TNMC. The defaults are 48 columns, 8 rows and
single stroke.
Enter up to fifteen (15) characters for the team
name and press .
Reinsert the BASEBALL (LL-2438) insert to
continue.

HOME-TEAM abbr
aaaaaaaaaa*

The TEAM NAME (LL-2441) insert must be
inserted to enter the Team Name Message Center
(TNMC) settings.
The TNMC is updated after each selection is
completed.
Use the COLUMNS, ROWS and STROKE keys to
select the WIDTH, HEIGHT and FONT of the
TNMC. The defaults are 48 columns, 8 rows and
single stroke.
Enter up to ten (10) characters for the team
abbreviation and press .
Reinsert the BASEBALL (LL-2438) insert to
continue.

54

Baseball Operations

Pitcher Number
home nn
nn = current setting

clear home
pitches y/n?

Enter the jersey number of the new pitcher and
press .
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

This function clears pitch count statistics and
should only be used before the start of a game or
when a new pitcher enters the game.
Press  to clear the in-game status, fouls and
points for all players in the home roster. Press
 to decline the selection. Press the down
arrow key to scroll to the next selection.

Display Menu
The Display Menu allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the
brightness of the scoreboard.
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN ENTER
DISPLAY MENU?

Action
Press  to select the Display submenu and
show the first prompt on the LCD.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Baseball Operations

55

LCD Display

MENU-DISPLAY RUN
SEG TIMER Y/N

Action
Note: The segment timer function is
disabled while the clock is running.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.

EXIT GAME
ARE YOU SURE Y/N

This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit
the sport code and enter the segment timer
Note: The SEGMENT TIMER (LL-2475) insert
must be inserted to enter the Segment Timer
settings.
Refer to Section 3 for more information on the
segment timer.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.
(Continued on next page)

56

Baseball Operations

(Continued from previous page)

MENU- Dimming
level (0-9): nn%
nn = current level
None = bright
90% =
80% =
70% =
60% =
50% =
40% =
30% =
20% =
10% =

<0>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>

Press <0> through <9> or use the arrow keys
<Í> <Î> to select the intensity for the digits on
the scoreboard.
Press  to resume the game in progress
using the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key <Ð> to scroll to the next
selection.
Note: Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products.
Indoor LED and incandescent products only
support one level of dimming at 50%.

Edit Settings
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
edit SETTINGS?

Action
Press  or the right or left arrow key to select
the Settings submenu and show the first prompt on
the LCD.
Refer to Section 4.4.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Time of Day
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
SELECT TOD?

Action
Press  or the right arrow key to select the
Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on
the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
(Continued on next page)

Baseball Operations

57

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*12, 2-24 HOUR

Action
Press <1> or <2> to display the time of day in 12
hour (default) or 24 hour format.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
TOD hh:mm:ss*
hh:mm:ss = current setting

Enter the time of day in hours, minutes and
seconds using the selected format on the number
pad and press .
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*GAME 2-tod
* = current setting

MENU-TIME OF DAY
BLANK GAME DATA?

4.4

Press <1> or <2> to display the game clock
(default) or the time of day clock on the scoreboard.
Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and
return to the game.

If 2-tod is selected, this message will be displayed.
Press  to blank all game data on the
scoreboard except for the Time of Day digits.

Settings
The user can edit the following settings when Edit Settings has been selected from the Main
Menu.
Main Clock
Note 1: The settings entered for Main Clock are used with the  key.
Note 2: The period, break, and overtime lengths are used differently depending on the
direction of the main clock. For count down, the main clock is set to the selected length,
decrements towards zero, and stops at zero. For count up, the main clock is set to zero,
increments towards the selected length, and stops when the selected length is reached.

58

Baseball Operations

LCD Display

Action

MAIN CLOCK-TIME
PERIOD hh:mm:ss

Enter the correct amount of time per period in minutes
and seconds on the number pad and press .

hh:mm:ss = current setting

For example, 02:00:00 per game.

Error Position
On some scoreboards the  key can also display the player’s position when the
Error Position setting is on.
LCD Display

error position
*on ← →off
* = current setting

Action
Press the left arrow key if the scoreboard can display
the player position, then press .
Press the right arrow key if the scoreboard cannot
display the player position, then press .

Auto Increment Pitches
When the Auto Pitch Increment setting is on and the AT BAT indicator for the batting team
is on, the  and  keys automatically increment the
Ball and Strike pitch count data of the team that is not at bat (AT BAT indicator off).
LCD Display

auto increment
pitches y/n? n*
n = current setting

Action
Press  to use the  and
 keys to automatically
increment the Ball and Strike pitch count data.
Press  to use the 
and  keys to manually
increment the Ball and Strike pitch count data.

Baseball Operations

59

Auto Increment Inning
The  key automatically increments the inning and resets the out number to zero
when:
• The Auto Inning Increment setting is on.
• The Home AT BAT indicator is on.
• The current out number is 3.
The  key turns on the Home AT BAT indicator when:
• The Auto Inning Increment setting is on.
• The Guest AT BAT indicator is on.
• The current out number is 3.
LCD Display

auto increment
INNING y/n?
n*

Action
Press  to automatically increment the inning.
Press  to disable this function.

n = current setting

Score by Inning
Some scoreboards display both the total score and the score by inning.
Note: If the Score By Inning setting is not enabled, the Display Innings and Inning
Sequence settings are not displayed.
LCD Display

score by inning
y/n? n*
n = current setting

Action
Press  if the scoreboard displays the score
by inning.
Press  if the scoreboard only displays the total
score.

Inning Sequence
Note: The Inning Sequence setting is not displayed if the Score By Inning setting is not
enabled.
Use Inning Sequence when the number of innings played exceeds the number of innings that
can be displayed on the scoreboard.

60

Baseball Operations

Select SHIFT when real time data (RTD) is used to display the inning numbers. SHIFT
moves all of the inning numbers and scores left one digit. The innings and scores
automatically shift when  is incremented and the inning number exceeds the
number of displayed innings.
For example:
Inning
Score

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
001020000 0

becomes

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
01020000 0 _

Select BLANK when the inning numbers are in a fixed position using decals. BLANK starts
a new set of inning numbers.
For example:
Inning
Score

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
001020000 0

LCD Display

inning sequence
*shift←→blank
* = current setting

becomes

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Action
Press the left arrow key to shift all of the inning
numbers and scores left one digit then press
.
Press the right arrow key to blank all of the inning
numbers and start a new set then press .

Display Innings
Select the number of innings that the scoreboard can display.
Note: The Display Innings setting is not displayed if the Score By Inning setting is not
enabled.
LCD Display

display innings
Size NN

Action
Enter the number of innings to be shown up to 12 and
then press .

NN = number up to 12

Baseball Operations

61

Display Time
Select if Time or At Bat will be displayed on the scoreboard.
Note: This applies only to BA-2001 and BA-2005 scoreboards.
LCD Display

display Time Y/n
*Time ←→At Bat
* = current setting

Action
Pressing  will select “Time”.
Pressing  will select “At Bat”.
An asterisk will indicate which is selected.

Select Captions
LCD Display

Select captions
on 1 ← → 2 off

Action
This menu option allows for the controlled backlit
captions to be turned ON/OFF.
Press the <1> key to select ON and OFF for
captions controlled by control #1.
Press the <2> key to select ON and OFF for
captions controlled by control #2.

Switch Output
The All Sport 5000 series console has a switch that can be used to drive a number of different
devices. The switch can be configured to operate under different settings. The default
setting is 1-CLOCK= 0.
To display the switch setting that you want to select:
Press the number (0,1,2,3) key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to
the desired setting.
Press  to select the new setting.
Press  or the down arrow key to leave the switch setting and display the next prompt.
The possible settings for the switch output are displayed on the following page:

62

Baseball Operations

Setting

Result

0-DISABLED

The switch remains open at all times and any external
devices are disabled.

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
0-DISABLED?
n = current setting

In count down mode, the switch closes when the main
clock reaches zero and remains closed until a
nonzero value is entered.

1-CLOCK = 0

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
1-CLOCK =0?
n = current setting

In count up mode, the switch closes when the main
clock reaches the proper period, break, or overtime
length and opens when any other value is entered.

The switch closes when the main clock is stopped
and opens when the main clock is running. External
devices are disabled when the main clock is running.

2-CLOCK STOP

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
2-CLOCK STOP?
n = current setting

The switch closes when the main horn sounds. This
could be when Auto Horn is enabled and the main
clock reaches zero or when  is pressed.

3-MAIN HORN

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
3-MAIN HORN?
n = current setting

Default Settings
Write the settings for this installation in the space (Custom) provided.
Setting

Default

Period Length

00:00

Error Position

On

Auto Increment
Pitches

No

Auto Increment
Inning

No

Score by Inning

No

Inning Sequence

Blank

Display Inning

10

Switch Output

1-Clock = 0

Baseball Operations

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

63

Section 5:

Pitch and Speed

Sport Insert: LL-2482
The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section. The Quick Reference is located in
Appendix D.
Reference Drawings:
Insert, Pitch Speed..............................................................................................Drawing A-130895
Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert. Read Section 2
carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions.
If an insert is lost or damaged, a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be
used until a replacement can be ordered.
Use the labels provided to attach the correct code number label to the sport insert in the appropriate
location. Write the code number in the space provided below.
If you do not know the code number to enter for your scoreboard, refer to Appendix B in this
manual. If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard, refer to the scoreboard
Installation and Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard.

5.1

General Pitch and Speed Information
Note: The pitch and speed program interfaces with the JUGS or STALKER radar gun to
provide pitch and speed information. The pitch type and speed can be displayed on a matrix
display, or the speed only may be displayed on a fixed digit display.

5.2

Pitch and Speed Keys
Pitch Keys
Note: In Auto mode, the pitch keys are not used.
The keys on the left side of the keypad are used to select the type of pitch for manual display
mode. In manual display mode the console waits to send the received pitch speed until a
pitch type key is pressed. Once a pitch type is selected, the pitch data is updated on the
display and sent as Real Time Data (RTD.)
Display Speed
 is used in manual mode to send the speed to the display as speed only
(blank frame.)

Pitch and Speed

65

Blank Time
LCD Display

BLANK TIME
MM:SS
MM:SS = current blank time

Action
This setting determines the length of time before
speed and pitch data is blanked on the display. Set
Blank Time to 00:00 to display speed and pitch
data continuously.

Speed
LCD Display

EDIT SPEED
nnn MPH
nnn = current speed

Action
The  key edits the value of speed that is
displayed on the scoreboard. The value is edited as
miles per hour or kilometers per hour depending on
the current display setting.

Show MPH and Show KPH
The  key displays the current pitch speed in miles per hour. The  key displays the current pitch speed in kilometers per hour.
Cycle MPH/KPH and Cycle KPH/MPH
Sets the order of cycle on a fixed digit speed display.
The  key sets the console to display miles per hour 1st followed by
kilometers per hour when a new pitch speed is received.
The  key displays kilometers per hour followed by miles per hour.
Cycle Time
LCD Display

CYCLE TIME
MM:SS
mm:ss = current cycle time

Action
This setting determines the length of time each
speed reading is displayed (MPH and KPH) before
displaying the opposite reading.
Note: If the console is set to cycle, a “Y” will be
displayed next to “CYCLE” on the LCD menu.
Press  or  to set console to cycle mode.

66

Pitch and Speed

Pitch Count Keys (Home and Guest)
Pressing one of the pitch count keys will increment the value by one. To edit one of the
values, use  as described below.
LCD Display

H. Pitcher edit
Strike: nnn
nnn = current value

Action
To edit one of the pitch count values, press 
and then press the key of the item to be modified.
The current value will be shown on the LCD. Enter
the new value on the number pad and press
.

Clear Pitch Count
LCD Display

G. pitcher
Clear all y/n?

Action
Press  and the console
will display the question “Clear All Y/N?” Press
 to clear the pitch counts or  to
abort the operation.

Display Home/Guest Count
Pressing  or  will send the RTD
information with a specific frame number for Home or Guest. This frame number can be
used to select the pitch count frame on a matrix display. The frame number is 19 for Home
and 20 for Guest.

5.3

Menu
The  key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport. The
up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list. Pressing a key other
than , , the arrow keys, and other allowed keys, exits the Menu function.
New Game
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW GAME?

Action
Press  to clear all of the program data for the
last game played or the game in progress and begin
running the selected sport.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Pitch and Speed

67

New Code
LCD Display

Action

MENU-MAIN
NEW CODE?

Press  to begin selection of a new code from
the ENTER CODE prompt.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Dimming Menu
The Dimming Menu allows the user to change the brightness of the scoreboard.
LCD Display

Action

MENU- Dimming
level (0-9): nn%
nn = current level
None = bright
90% =
80% =
70% =
60% =
50% =
40% =
30% =
20% =
10% =

<0>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>

Press <0> through <9> or use the arrow keys <Í>
<Î> to select the intensity for the digits on the
scoreboard.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data, and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key <Ð> to scroll to the next
selection.
Note: Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products.
Indoor LED and incandescent products only support
one level of dimming at 50%.

Radar Gun Type
LCD Display

RADAR GUN TYPE
*JUGS←→STALKER
* = current setting

68

Action
Press the left or right arrow keys to select the
type of radar gun to interface with and press
.

Pitch and Speed

LCD Display

Action

STALKER GUN TYPE
*SPORT←→PRO
* = current setting

If the gun is a stalker type, the next prompt will be
to select which type of stalker gun is used. Press
the left or right arrow keys to select and press
.

Speed Adjust Coefficient
LCD Display

Action

SPEED ADJUST
.nnnn
nnnn = current setting

In some locations, the radar gun is mounted at
an angle offset from the direct line of the pitch,
resulting in a lower speed than actual. If this is
the case for your application, enter the cosine of
the angle between the pitcher-catcher line and
the radar gun. The console will adjust the speed
received accordingly.
Set the speed adjust coefficient to 0 if no speed
adjustment is necessary.

Angle Offset

Coefficient

10°

0.9848
0.9659
0.9397
0.9063
0.866

15°
20°
25°
30°

Approximately every one hundredth from the
coefficient will increase the speed by one mph.
Example: 0.9848 = 95mph
0.9748 = 96mph
For more exact calculations refer to
Drawing A-243741

Select Speed
LCD Display

Select Range
Speed: > NN mph
nn= current setting

Pitch and Speed

Action
This setting allows the user to select a minimum
speed that will be accepted from the radar gun.
The default speed setting is zero mph and will
allow all speeds.

69

Speed Indicator
LCD Display

Action

Select Indicator
1st NN* mph

This setting allows the user to select the speed at
which the three speed indicators should light.
Speeds below the 1st setting will light the 1st
indicator.

nn= current setting

Select Indicator
2nd NN* mph

Speeds equal to or greater than the 1st and less
than the 2nd setting will light the second indicator.
Speeds greater than this will logout the 3rd
indicator. Enter the desired value and press
.

nn= current setting

Display Mode
LCD Display

Action

DISPLAY MODE
*AUTO←→MANUAL

This setting determines when the pitch information
received will be updated to fixed digit scoreboards
and RTD. In Auto mode scoreboards and RTD is
updated as soon as speed information is received
from the radar gun.

* = current setting

In Manual mode the console waits for one of the
pitch keys to be pressed before updating with the
new pitch speed.
Note: In Auto mode the pitch keys are not used.

Default Settings
Write the settings for this installation in the space (Custom) provided.

70

Setting

Default

Radar Gun Type

JUGS

Speed Adjust Coefficient

0

Cycle Time

00:05

Blank Time

00:20

Display Mode

AUTO

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

Pitch and Speed

RTD Item Numbers
The Pitch and speed program uses unique RTD item numbers to display speed and pitch
information. Items 23-25 display either MPH or KPH depending on cycle and display
settings.
Item #

Data

1

MPH x100

2

MPH x10

3

MPH x1

4-19

Pitch type text – 16 characters

20

KPH x100

21

KPH x10

22

KPH x1

23

MPH/KPH x100

24

MPH/KPH x10

25

MPH/KPH x1

26

MPH indicator

27

KPH indicator

28

Home Ball count x100

29

Home Ball count x10

30

Home Ball count x1

31

Home Strike count x100

32

Home Strike count x10

33

Home Strike count x1

34

Home Total Pitch count x100

35

Home Total Pitch count x10

36

Home Total Pitch count x1

37

Home Strike Out count x100

38

Home Strike Out count x10

39

Home Strike Out count x1

40

Guest Ball count x100

41

Guest Ball count x10

42

Guest Ball count x1

43

Guest Strike count x100

44

Guest Strike count x10

45

Guest Strike count x1

46

Guest Total Pitch count x100

47

Guest Total Pitch count x10

48

Guest Total Pitch count x1

49

Guest Strike Out count x100

50

Guest Strike Out count x10

51

Guest Strike Out count x1

Pitch and Speed

71

Frame Number and Pitch Types
The frame number sent with each RTD frame also represents the pitch type (for manual
mode). The pitch types for each frame number are shown below. Standard RTD Port
configuration: 1,200 Baud Rate, 8 Data Bits, and No Parity for the Jugs or Stalker Sport gun
type. Use a Baud Rate of 9600 for the Stalker Pro gun.

Frame #

72

Pitch Type

1

Curve Ball

2

Slider

3

Sinker

4

Change Up

5

Knuckle Ball

6

Fast Ball

7

Split Finger

8

Screw Ball

9

Breaking Ball

10

(Blank)

11

Other

12

User 1

13

Off Speed

14

User 2

15

User 3

16

Fork Ball

17

User 4

18

Palm Ball

19

Home Pitch Count

20

Guest Pitch Count

Pitch and Speed

Section 6:

Clock Console Operation

Sport Insert 0G-136301
The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section. The Quick Reference is located in
Appendix D.
Reference Drawings:
Insert, Clock Console..........................................................................................Drawing A-136301
Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert. Read Section 2
carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions.
If an insert is lost or damaged, a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be
used until a replacement can be ordered.

6.1

Clock Console Codes
The clock console is used to keep clock and timer information for basketball and football
codes. The code numbers are listed below.
CODE:
1000
6000

6.2

- Basketball Main Clock and Shot Clock
- Football Main Clock and Shot Clock

Clock Console Keys
Timer Start
 starts the Shot Clock or Play Clock timer.
Note: This function may also be implemented with a remote start/stop switch connected to
J7.
Timer Stop
 stops the Shot Clock or Play Clock timer
Note: This function may also be implemented with a remote start/stop switch connected to
J7.

Clock Console Operation

73

Set Timer Time
LCD Display

PLAY CLOCK
CURR – mm:ss

Action
 sets the current time displayed
on the shot clock or play clock timer.

mm:ss = current setting

Set Reset Time 1
LCD Display

PLAY CLOCK
RESET 1 – mm:ss

Action
 sets the current Reset 1
value for the shot clock or play clock timer.

mm:ss = current setting

Set Reset Time 2
LCD Display

PLAY CLOCK
RESET 2 – mm:ss

Action
 sets the current Reset 2
value for the shot clock or play clock timer.

mm:ss = current setting

Timer Reset 1
 Resets the play clock or shot clock to the Reset 1 value.
Note: This function may also be implemented with a remote start/stop reset switch
connected to J7.
Timer Reset 2
 Resets the play clock or shot clock to the Reset 2 value.
Note: This function may also be implemented with a remote start/stop reset switch
connected to J7.

6.3

Menu
The  key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport. The
up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list. Pressing a key other
than , , the arrow keys and other allowed keys, exits the Menu function.
Refer to Section 7 for the Basketball Menu Key functions.
Refer to Section 8 for the Football Menu Key functions.

74

Clock Console Operation

6.4

Settings
Refer to Section 7 for Basketball Settings.
Refer to Section 8 for Football Settings.
Note: Only settings that apply to the operation of the main clock or shot/play clocks will
affect the operation of the clock console.

Clock Console Operation

75

Section 7:

Basketball Operations

Sport Insert: LL-2433
The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section.
The Team Name insert and Block Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A.
The Quick Reference is located in Appendix D.
Reference Drawings:
Insert, Basketball.................................................................................................Drawing A-120121
Block Diagrams, A/S5000/3000, BB, VB & WR #1.............................................Drawing A-124686
Block Diagrams, A/S5000/3000, BB, VB & WR #3.............................................Drawing A-124688
Insert, Team Name .............................................................................................Drawing A-125290
Block Diagrams, A/S5000/3000, BB, VB & WR #2.............................................Drawing A-125415
Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert. Read Section 2
carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions.
If an insert is lost or damaged, a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be
used until a replacement can be ordered.
Use the labels provided in Appendix B to attach the correct code number label to the sport insert in
the appropriate location. Write the code number in the space provided below.
Write the correct code number here.

If you do not know the code number to enter for your scoreboard, refer to Appendix B in this
manual. If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard, refer to the Installation and
Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard.

Basketball Operations

77

1.1

Basketball Keys
Set Shot Time
LCD Display

SHOT CLOCK-EDIT
CURRENT mm:ss*
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Action
Press  to display the configured
shot clock time length.
To accept the shot clock time length press .
To decline the selection of the shot clock time length
press .
To change the shot clock time length and set the
shot clock enter the new time in minutes and
seconds on the number pad and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return to
the game.

SHOT CLOCK-EDIT
RESET 1 mm:ss*
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Press  a second time to display
the configured time for shot clock Reset 1 length.
To accept the shot clock Reset 1 length press
.
To decline the selection of the shot clock Reset 1
length, press .
To change the shot clock Reset 1 length and set the
shot clock enter the new time in minutes and
seconds on the number pad and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return to
the game.
Note: The configured time of shot clock is set using
the EDIT SETTINGS function when a new code is
selected.
(Continued on next page)

78

Basketball Operations

(Continued on previous page)

LCD Display

SHOT CLOCK-EDIT
RESET 2 mm:ss*
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Action
Press  a second time to display
the configured time for shot clock Reset 2 length.
To accept the shot clock Reset 2 length press
.
To decline the selection of the shot clock Reset 2
length press .
To change the shot clock Reset 2 length and set the
shot clock enter the new time in minutes and
seconds on the number pad and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return to
the game.
Note: The configured time of shot clock is set using
the EDIT SETTINGS function when a new code is
selected.

Recall Shot Time
LCD Display

shot clock -Mode
Recall y/n

Action
Press  to recall the shot
time that was remaining before the last shot clock
reset was pressed.
To accept the recall press .
To decline the recall press .

Time Out On/Off
 stops and starts the time out clock. The length of both the full and
partial time outs can also be changed when the time out clock is stopped.
Note 1: Only the time outs configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the
LCD and available for selection (please refer to the table on the following page).
Note 2: The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs.

Basketball Operations

79

LCD Display

TIME OUTs-SELECT
FULL MM:SS
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Action
Press  to display the
configured time for full time out length.
To accept the full time out length press .
To decline the selection of the full time out length
press .
To change the full time out length enter the new
length in minutes and seconds on the number pad
and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return to
the game.

TIME OUT-SELECT
PARTIAL MM:SS
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Press  a second time to
display the configured time for partial time out length.
To accept the partial time out length press .
To decline the selection of the partial time out length
press .
To change the partial time out length enter the new
length in minutes and seconds on the number pad
and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return to
the game.

Blank Player Foul
Blanks the digits of the Player-Foul field of the scoreboard.
Period +1
LCD Display

PERIOD-+1
n
n = current setting

80

Action
Press  to increment the period number.
The full and partial time outs and team fouls are
automatically reset at halftime.

Basketball Operations

Time Out
The home and guest  keys are used to decrement the number of time outs
remaining and start the time out clock. The scoreboard indicator is turned on when the type
of time out is selected (full or partial). The scoreboard indicator is turned off when the time
out clock expires or is stopped.
Note 1: Only the types (full or partial) of time outs that were configured in the EDIT
SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection.
Note 2: The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs.
LCD Display

TIME OUT-HOME
FULL
n
n = current setting

Action
Press  to display the number of full time
outs remaining.
To accept the full time out and start the time out clock
press . Full time out decrements.
To decline the selection of a full time out press .
Full time out does not decrement.
Note: The up and down arrow keys can also be used to
select the full and partial time outs.

TIME OUT-HOME
PARTIAL n
n = current setting

Press  a second time to display the
number of partial time outs remaining.
To accept the partial time out and start the time out
clock press . Partial time out decrements.
To decline the selection of a partial time out press
. Partial time out does not decrement.
Note: The up and down arrow keys can also be used to
select the full and partial time outs.

TIME OUT-HOME
NO TIME OUTS

Basketball Operations

This message appears when there are no time outs left.

81

Score +1, +2, +3, -1
The home and guest ,  and  keys are used to increment
the team score and the  key is used to decrement the team score.
LCD Display

TEAM SCORE-+1
HOME
nnn
nnn = current setting

TEAM SCORE-+1
HOME PLAYER nn*
nn = current setting

Action
Press the appropriate score key to increment or
decrement the score for the home or guest team.
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new
value for the team score of the corresponding team.

If the program is configured to update the player
points, this prompt displays asking for a player
number.
Enter the jersey number of the player who scored the
points and press .

HOME PLAYER nn
NOT FOUND, ADD?
nn = current setting

If the player is not in the roster, this prompt asks if the
player should be added.
Press  to add the player to the roster and credit
the points to that player.
Press  to decline the entry of the player number.

HOME PLAYER nn
ROSTER FULL

This message displays when the answer to the
previous prompt is YES and the roster is full.

nn = current setting

HOME PLAYER nn
POINTS
nn
nn = current setting

82

The player’s number and number of points display if
the player was found in the game or correctly added
to the roster.

Basketball Operations

Team Fouls +1
LCD Display

TEAM FOULS-+1
HOME
nn
nn = current setting

TEAM FOULS-+1
HOME PLAYER nn*
nn = current setting

Action
Press the home or guest  key to
increment the number of team fouls for the
corresponding team. The number of team fouls stop
incrementing at the number of fouls configured for
the 1-on-1 or 2-shot bonus.

If the program is configured to update the player
fouls, this prompt displays asking for a player
number.
Enter the jersey number of the player who made the
foul and press .

HOME PLAYER nn
NOT FOUND, ADD?
nn = current setting

If the player is not in the roster, this prompt asks if
the player should be added.
Press  to add the player to the roster and
credit the foul to that player.
Press  to decline the entry of the player
number.

HOME PLAYER nn
ROSTER FULL

This message displays when the answer to the
previous prompt is YES and the roster is full.

nn = current setting

HOME PLAYER nn
FOULS
n
nn, n = current setting

The player’s number and the number of fouls display
if the player was found in the game or correctly
added to the roster.
Note: If a player number is not entered the fouls will
not be displayed.

Basketball Operations

83

Bonus
Note: Only the types of bonuses that were configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are
displayed on the LCD and available for selection.
LCD Display

Action

HOME BONUS
1-ON-1

Press the home or guest  key to turn on
the 1-on-1 bonus indicator for that team.

HOME BONUS
2-SHOT

Press the home or guest  key a second
time to turn on the 2 shot bonus indicator for that
team.

HOME BONUS
OFF

Press the  key a third time to turn off
both indicators.

Possession
LCD Display

Action

HOME POSSESSION
ON

Press the home or guest  key to turn on
the possession indicator for that team.

HOME POSSESSION
OFF

To turn off the possession indicator press the same
 key a second time or press the opposite
 key.

In Game/Out of Game
The  and  keys are only functional when the Home or Guest
 key has been pressed. Refer to Subsection Player.
Delete Player
The  key is only functional when the Home or Guest  key has
been pressed. Refer to Subsection Player.

84

Basketball Operations

Player
Note: If player stats are being received from DSTI the keys PLAYER, IND SUB and MASS
SUB will be disabled. The LCD will display the messages shown below when these keys are
pressed.
LCD Display

STATS received
Key disabled
Exit stats mode
Y/n?

LCD Display

HOME PLAYER
nn*
nn = current setting

Action
The key disabled message will display for one
second and then the  message will
display and wait for a  or  key. If the
 key is pressed then stats data will be saved
in the console and the console will 
mode until another stats packet is received. This
will allow the operator to enter player stats from the
console if the DSTI feed is lost.

Action
When the home or guest  key is
pressed, this prompt asks the jersey number of the
player to be edited.
Enter the jersey number on the number pad and
press .

HOME PLAYER nn
NOT FOUND, aDD?
nn, dd = current settings

If the player is not in the roster, this prompt asks if
the player should be added.
Press  to add the player to the roster.
Press  to decline the entry of the player
number.

HOME PLAYER nn
ROSTER FULL

This message displays when the answer to the
previous prompt is YES and the roster is full.

nn = current setting
(Continued on next page)

Basketball Operations

85

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

HOME PLAYER nn
S-I F-n* P-nn
nn = player number
S-I = in game
S-o = out of game
F-n = number of fouls
P-nn = number of points

Action
If the player is found, the player’s game status and
statistics can be changed.
To change a player’s statistics:

1. Use the up and down arrow keys to select
the player from the list.

2. Use the left and right arrow keys to select
the statistic to be changed.

3. Enter the correct number for the selected
statistic on the number pad and press
.
To change a player’s game status:

1. Use the up and down arrow keys to select
the player from the list.

2. Press  or .
3. The S field on the display changes to show
the player’s current status.
Press  to exit the menu and return to the
game.

HOME PLAYER nn
DELETE PLAYER?

To delete an incorrect player from the roster use the
up and down arrow keys to select the player from
the list and press .
Press  to remove the player from the roster.
Press  or  to decline the deletion
process and return to the game.

86

Basketball Operations

Individual Substitution
LCD Display

IND SUB-HOME
nn* in for nn*
nn = current setting

Action
When the home or guest  key is
pressed, this prompt asks the jersey number of the
player entering and leaving the game.
Enter the jersey number of the player entering the game
on the number pad and press .
Enter the jersey number of the player leaving the game
on the number pad and press .

IND SUB-HOME
SUB OK

This message is displayed if no errors are found.

IND SUB-HOME
SUB NOT MADE

This message is displayed for the following reasons:
The player going into the game is already marked as in
the game.
The player coming out of the game is not marked as in
the game.

IND SUB-HOME
NOT FOUND nn
nn = current setting

This message is displayed if the player going in or the
player coming out of the game is not found in the roster.
Press  to correct the jersey number.
Enter the correct jersey number and press .

Basketball Operations

87

Mass Substitution
LCD Display

MASS SUB-HOME
PLAYER 1 nn*
nn = current setting

Action
After the home or guest  key is pressed
the LCD will display a message on the LCD asking for
the first of five player numbers that are going into the
game. Enter the jersey number on the number pad
and press  for each of the five players.
Press  at any time to exit the Mass
Substitution function.
When the home or guest  key is
pressed, this prompt asks the jersey number of the
first player entering the game.
Enter the jersey number of the each of the five players
entering the game on the number pad and press
.

mass SUB-HOME
SUB OK

This message is displayed if no errors are found.

MASS SUB-HOME
DUPLICATE nn

This message displays for each duplicate jersey
number found for the five players going into the game.

nn = current setting

Press  to correct the jersey number.
Enter the correct jersey number and press .

NOT FOUND,ADD?
Player 1
nn
nn = current setting

This message displays for each player not found in
the roster.
Press  to add the jersey number.
Press  to ignore and select another jersey
number.
Enter the correct jersey number and press .

88

Basketball Operations

7.1

Edit
The  key allows the user to select and edit the following scoreboard fields.
Press  and the key for the home or guest field to be edited.
Time Out
Note 1: Only the time outs configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the
LCD and available for selection.
Note 2: The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs.
LCD Display

TIME OUT-HOME
FULL
n*
n = current setting

Action
Press   for the home or guest
team to display the current setting of full time outs
remaining.
Enter the correct number of full time outs on the
number pad and press .

TIME OUT-HOME
PARTIAL n*
n = current setting

Press   for the home or guest
team a second time or the down arrow key to display
the current setting of full time outs remaining.
Enter the correct number of partial time outs on the
number pad and press .

Score +1, +2, +3, -1
LCD Display

TEAM SCORE-EDIT
HOME
nnn*
nn = current setting

Action
Press  and any of the SCORE keys for the
home or guest team to display the current team score
setting.
Enter the correct team score on the number pad and
press .

Basketball Operations

89

Team Fouls +1
LCD Display

TEAM FOULS-EDIT
HOME
nn*
nn = current setting

Action
Press   for the home or guest
team to display the current team foul setting.
Enter the correct number of team fouls on the number
pad and press .

Period +1
LCD Display

PERIOD-EDIT
n*
n = current setting

Action
Press   for the home or guest
team to display the period setting.
Enter the correct period number on the number pad
and press .

Time Out On/Off
LCD Display

TIME OUTs-edit
FULL MM:SS
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

TIME OUT- edit
PARTIAL MM:SS
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Action
Press   to display the
current time setting for full time outs.
Enter the correct time on the number pad and press
.

Press  a second time or the
down arrow key to display the configured time for
partial time out length.
Enter the correct time on the number pad and press
.

90

Basketball Operations

7.2

Menu
The  key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport. The
up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list. Pressing a key other
than , , the arrow keys, and other allowed keys, exit the Menu function.
The MENU function should be used at the beginning of each new game to edit the Home
and Guest Rosters.
New Game
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW GAME?

Action
Press  to clear all of the program data for the
last game played or the game in progress and begin
running the selected sport.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

New Code
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW CODE?

Action
Press  to begin selection of a new code from
the ENTER CODE prompt.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Basketball Operations

91

Home Roster, Guest Roster
Home Roster and Guest Roster are entered in the same way. Home Roster is used as an
example.
LCD Display

MENU-ROSTER
SELECT HOME

Action
Press  or the right or left arrow key to select the
Home or Guest Roster submenu and show the first
prompt on the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using the
current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection.

HOME-TEAM NAME
aaaaaaaaaaaaa*

The TEAM NAME (LL-2441) insert must be inserted
to enter the Team Name Message Center (TNMC)
settings.
The TNMC is updated after each selection is
completed.
Use the COLUMNS, ROWS and STROKE keys to
select the WIDTH, HEIGHT and FONT of the TNMC.
The defaults are 48 columns, 8 rows and single stroke.
Enter up to fifteen (15) characters for the team name
and press .
Insert the BASKETBALL (LL-2433) insert to
continue.

HOME-TEAM abbr
aaaaaaaaaa*

The TEAM NAME (LL-2441) insert must be inserted
to enter the Team Name Message Center (TNMC)
settings.
The TNMC is updated after each selection is
completed.
Use the COLUMNS, ROWS and STROKE keys to
select the WIDTH, HEIGHT and FONT of the TNMC.
The defaults are 48 columns, 8 rows and single stroke.
Enter up to ten (10) characters for the team
abbreviation and press .
Insert the BASKETBALL (LL-2433) insert to
continue.

92

Basketball Operations

LCD Display

MENU-HOME
EDIT PLAYERS?
MENU-HOME
PLAYER 01 nn*
nn = current setting

Action
Press  to assign the jersey numbers for all the
players in the roster.
Press  or the left arrow key to exit the submenu
and return to the Main menu.
Enter the jersey number for that player from the official
roster and press . The next player is shown
on the LCD. Continue entering the jersey numbers for
up to 15 players.
Press the  key to advance to the next option.

MENU-HOME
CLEAR STATS?

This function clears all game statistics and should only
be used before the start of a game.
Press  to clear the in-game status fouls, and
points for all players in the home roster.
Press  to decline the selection.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection.

Display Menu
The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the
brightness of the scoreboard.
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN ENTER
DISPLAY MENU?

Action
Press  to select the Display submenu and
show the first prompt on the LCD.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.
(Continued on next page)

Basketball Operations

93

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

MENU-DISPLAY RUN
SEG TIMER Y/N

Action
Note: The segment timer function is disabled while
the clock is running.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.

EXIT GAME
ARE YOU SURE Y/N

This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit
the sport code and enter the segment timer
The SEGMENT TIMER (LL-2475) insert must be
inserted to enter the Segment Timer settings.
Refer to Section 3 for more information on the
Segment Timer.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.

MENU- Dimming
level (0-9): nn%
nn = current level
None = bright
<0>
90% =
<1>
80% =
<2>
70% =
<3>
60% =
<4>
50% =
<5>
40% =
<6>
30% =
<7>
20% =
<8>
10% =
<9>

94

Press <0> through <9> or use the arrow keys <Í>
<Î> to select the intensity for the digits on the
scoreboard.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data, and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key <Ð> to scroll to the next
selection.
Note: Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products.
Indoor LED and incandescent products only
support one level of dimming at 50%.

Basketball Operations

Edit Settings
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
edit SETTINGS?

Action
Press  or the right or left arrow key to
select the Settings submenu and show the first
prompt on the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress
using the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Time of Day
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
SELECT TOD?

Action
Press  or the right arrow key to select the
Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt
on the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress
using the current data and exit the menu.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*12, 2-24 HOUR

Press <1> or <2> to display the time of day in 12
hour (default) or 24 hour format.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll
to the next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
TOD hh:mm:ss*
hh:mm:ss = current setting

Enter the time of day in hours, minutes and
seconds using the selected format on the number
pad and press .
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll
to the next selection.
(Continued on next page)

Basketball Operations

95

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*GAME 2-tod
* = current setting

Action
Press <1> or <2> to display the game clock
(default) or the time of day clock on the
scoreboard.
Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and
return to the game.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
BLANK GAME DATA?

If 2-TOD is selected this message will be
displayed.
Press  to blank all game data on the
scoreboard except for the Time of Day digits.

7.3

Settings
The user can edit the following settings when EDIT SETTINGS has been selected from the
Main Menu.
Number of Periods
LCD Display

NO. OF PERIODS=n
2 OR 4?
n = current setting

96

Action
The No. of Periods indicates whether the game
consists of two halves or four quarters
Press <2> or <4> on the number pad to choose
the desired number of periods.

Basketball Operations

Main Clock
Note 1: The settings entered for Main Clock are used with the  key.
Note 2: The period, break and overtime lengths are used differently depending on the
direction of the main clock. For count down, the main clock is set to the selected length,
decrements towards zero, and stops at zero. For count up, the main clock is set to zero,
increments towards the selected length, and stops when the selected length is reached.
LCD Display

MAIN CLOCK-MODE
TENTH SECOND? n
n = current setting

Action
When the main clock is set to count down and tenths
of a second is selected, the main clock displays in
tenths of a second remaining when the time is below
one minute.
Press  to set the main clock to display tenths
of a second.
Press  to display whole seconds.

MAIN CLOCK-TIME
PERIOD mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Enter the correct amount of time per period in
minutes and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 20:00 per half or 8:00 per quarter
Note: Pressing  to select the period time
as the main clock setting will increment the current
period number if the clock value was previously zero.

MAIN CLOCK-TIME
BREAK mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

MAIN CLOCK-TIME
OVERTIME mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Set the amount of time between periods.
Enter the correct amount of time for break length in
minutes and seconds on the number pad and press
. For example, 1:00

Set the amount of time for the overtime periods.
Enter the correct amount of time for overtime periods
in minutes and seconds on the number pad and
press .
For example, 5:00

Basketball Operations

97

Shot Clock
LCD Display

MAIN CLOCK-TIME
RESET mm:ss*
mm:ss = current setting

Action
This setting is used for the  button on the
remote shot clock control console.
Note: The current setting for the  time
displays on the LCD until the first number key is
pressed.
Enter the correct amount of reset time in minutes
and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 00:45

SHOT CLOCK-MODE
SYNC W/ MAIN?

Press  to synchronize the shot clock with the
main clock.
If  for the main clock is pressed while the
main and shot clocks are running, the shot clock
stops. The shot clock restarts when  is
pressed for the main clock.
Press  to allow the shot clock to run
independently of the main clock. The shot clock
starts and stops only with the switch on the remote
shot clock control console.

SHOT CLOCK-MODE
AUTO BLANK?

Press  to blank the shot clock time when the
shot clock time is greater than or equal to the main
clock time. The shot clock is reset and stopped
when the display is blanked to eliminate inadvertent
sounding of shot clock horn.
Press  to display the shot clock time at all
times.

98

Basketball Operations

Time Outs
Note 1: If a full or partial time out is not needed for the HOME or GUEST  keys,
enter zero for the number of time outs.
Note 2: If a full or partial time out is not needed for , enter zero for the
time.
Note 3: The number for each type of time out must be manually entered for an overtime
period using the   key sequence for each team.
LCD Display

TIME OUTS-MODE
FULL
n*

Action
Enter the number of full time outs on the number
pad and press .

n = current setting

TIME OUTS-TIME
FULL mm:ss*
mm:ss = current setting

Enter the amount of time for a full time out in
minutes and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 1:00

TIME OUTS-MODE
WARNING mm:ss*
mm:ss = current setting

A warning horn can be configured to signal the end
of a full/partial time out. While the time out clock is
counting down, the horn will sound for one second
when the warning time is reached. Enter a zero for
the time to disable the warning horn.
Enter the time in minutes and seconds on the
number pad and press .
(Continued on next page)

Basketball Operations

99

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

TIME OUTS-MODE
PARTIAL n*

Action
Enter the number of partial time outs on the number
pad and press .

n = current setting

TIME OUTS-TIME
PARTIAL mm:ss*
mm:ss = current setting

Enter the amount of time for a partial time out in
minutes and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 00:20

TIME OUTS-MODE
SHOW ON MAIN? n
n = current setting

Press  to display the time out time on the
LCD and the main clock digits of the scoreboard
while the time out clock is active.
Press  to display the time out time on the LCD
only.

Team Score
LCD Display

TEAM SCORE-MODE
UPDATE PLAYER?

Action
This feature must be enabled for all player-foulpoints panels.
Press  to allow entry of a player number after
the home or guest team score are incremented or
decremented.
Press  to prevent entry of a player number.

100

Basketball Operations

Team Fouls
LCD Display

TEAM FOULS-MODE
UPDATE PLAYER?

Action
This feature must be enabled for all player-foulpoints panels.
Press  to allow entry of a player number
after the home or guest team fouls are
incremented or decremented.
Press  to prevent entry of a player number.

TEAM FOULS-MODE
1-ON-1 BONUS nn*
nn = current setting

Enter the number of team fouls permitted before
the 1-on-1 bonus applies on the number pad and
press .
The home and guest team fouls stop incrementing
at this number unless the 2-shot bonus is enabled.
Enter zero to disable this feature.

TEAM FOULS-MODE
2-SHOT BONUS nn*
nn = current setting

Enter the number of team fouls permitted before
the 2-shot bonus applies on the number pad and
press .
Enter zero to disable this feature.

Select Captions
LCD Display

Select captions
on 1 ← → 2 off

Action
This menu option allows for the controlled backlit
captions to be turned ON/OFF.
Press the <1> key to select ON and OFF for
captions controlled by control #1.
Press the <2> key to select ON and OFF for
captions controlled by control #2.

Basketball Operations

101

Select Team Foul Display
LCD Display

team fouls
show on stats? Y

Action
This menu option allows the selection of showing
team fouls on line 6 of the player stats panel.
To accept display of team fouls, press .
To decline display of team fouls, press .

Score by Quarter
LCD Display

Score by Quarter
y/N? x
x = current setting

Action
This feature allows for scores to be recorded by
quarter. This data is available on the RTD output.
Press  to score by quarter or press  to
not score by quarter.
Note: If this feature is enabled, all scores are edited
by quarter. Use this function only when needed.

Switch Output
The All Sport 5000 series console has a switch that can be used to drive a number of different
devices. The switch can be configured to operate under different settings. The default setting
is 1-CLOCK= 0.
To display the switch setting that you want to select:

102

•

Press the number (0,1,2,3) key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to
scroll to the desired setting.

•

Press  to select the new setting.

•

Press  or the down arrow key to leave the switch setting and display the next
prompt.

Basketball Operations

The possible settings for the switch output are as follows:
Setting

Result

0-DISABLED

The switch remains open at all times and any external
devices are disabled.

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
0-DISABLED?
n = current setting

1-CLOCK = 0

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
1-CLOCK =0?
n = current setting

2-CLOCK STOP

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
2-CLOCK STOP?

In count down mode, the switch closes when the main
clock reaches zero and remains closed until a
nonzero value is entered.
In count up mode, the switch closes when the main
clock reaches the proper period, break, or overtime
length and opens when any other value is entered.

The switch closes when the main clock is stopped
and opens when the main clock is running. External
devices are disabled when the main clock is running.

n = current setting

3-MAIN HORN

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
3-MAIN HORN?

The switch closes when the main horn sounds. This
could be when Auto Horn is enabled and the main
clock reaches zero or when  is pressed.

n = current setting

Basketball Operations

103

Default Settings
Write the settings for this installation in the space (Custom) provided.

104

Setting

Default

Number of Periods
Tenth of a Second
Period Length
Break Length
Overtime Length
Shot Clock Reset
Shot Clock Sync with
Shot Clock Auto Blank
Full Time Outs
Full Time Out
Partial Time Outs
Partial Time Out
Update Player Score
Update Player Fouls
1-on-1 Bonus
2-Shot Bonus

4
Yes
8:00
10:00
5:00
0:45
Yes
Yes
3
1:00
2
00:20
No
Yes
5
0

Switch Output

1-Clock = 0

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

Basketball Operations

Section 8:

Football Operations

Sport Insert: LL-2437
The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section. The Team Name insert and Block
Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A. The Quick Reference is located in Appendix D.
Reference Drawings:
Insert, Football ....................................................................................................Drawing A-122652
Block Diagrams, A/S5000/3000, Outdoor Sports ...............................................Drawing A-124690
Insert, Team Name .............................................................................................Drawing A-125290
Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert. Read Section 2
carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions.
If an insert is lost or damaged, a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be
used until a replacement can be ordered.
Use the labels provided in Appendix B to attach the correct code number label to the sport insert in
the appropriate location. Write the code number in the space provided below.
Write the correct code number here.

If you do not know the code number to enter for your scoreboard, refer to Appendix B in this
manual. If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard, refer to the Installation and
Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard.

8.1

Football Keys
Time Out On/Off
 stops and starts the time out clock. The length of both the full and
partial time outs can also be changed when the time out clock is stopped.
Note 1: Only the time outs configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the
LCD and available for selection (please refer to the table on the following page).
Note 2: The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs.

Football Options

105

LCD Display

TIME OUT-SELECT
FULL MM:SS
mm:ss = minutes,
seconds

Action
Press  to display the configured
time for full time out length.
To accept the full time out length, press .
To decline the selection of the full time out length,
press .
To change the full time out length, enter the new length
in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press
.
Press  twice to clear changes and return to
the game.

TIME OUT-SELECT
PARTIAL MM:SS
mm:ss = minutes,
seconds

Press  a second time to display
the configured time for partial time out length.
To accept the partial time out length, press .
To decline the selection of the partial time out length,
press .
To change the partial time out length, enter the new
length in minutes and seconds on the number pad and
press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return to
the game.

Set Play Clock
The PLAY CLOCK setting is used by the remote play clock console. The configured play
clock times are set using the EDIT SETTINGS function when a new code is selected.
Note 1: When RESET ON STOP is set to yes (Y) the STOP switch automatically resets the
play clock using the RESET 1 time and the RESET button uses the RESET 2 time.
Note 2: When RESET ON STOP is set to no (N) the STOP switch does not reset the play
clock and the RESET button uses the RESET 1 time (please refer to the table on the
following page).

106

Football Options

LCD Display

PLAY CLOCK-EDIT
CURR mm:ss
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Action
Press  to display the
configured time for overtime length.
To accept the play clock time length, press .
To decline the selection of the play clock time
length, press .
To change the play clock time length and set the
play clock, enter the new time in minutes and
seconds on the number pad and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return
to the game.

PLAY CLOCK-EDIT
RESET 1 mm:ss
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Press  a second time to
display the configured time for overtime length.
To accept the play clock reset 1 length, press
.
To decline the selection of the play clock, reset 1
length press .
To change the play clock reset 1 length and set the
play clock, enter the new time in minutes and
seconds on the number pad and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return
to the game.
(Continued on next page)

Football Options

107

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

PLAY CLOCK-EDIT
RESET 2 mm:ss
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Action
Press  a second time to
display the configured time for overtime length.
To accept the play clock reset 2 length, press
.
To decline the selection of the play clock reset 2
length, press .
To change the play clock reset 2 length and set the
play clock, enter the new time in minutes and
seconds on the number pad and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return
to the game.

Recall Last Down
The  key is used to re-display the Ball On, Down, To Go, and
Possession values of the previous play if a new value has been incorrectly entered. If Auto
Calculate is off, this function is disabled.
When the LCD Display is as shown, the following actions may be selected.
LCD Display

last down
recall y/n

Action
Press  to redisplay the Ball
On, Down, To Go, and Possession values of the
previous play.
If Auto Calculate is off, this function is disabled.
Press  to use the previous values.
Press  to use the values that were just entered.

108

Football Options

Quarter +1
LCD Display

quarter-+1
n
n = current setting

quarter-Swap →
n
Y/N
nn = current setting

Action
Press  to increment the quarter
number. The full time outs are automatically reset
at halftime.

When the quarter number increments to 2 or 4 the
PLAY DIRECTION can be changed.
Press  to change PLAY DIRECTION.
Press  to leave PLAY DIRECTION the same.

Yards To Go
The  key is used to manually enter the field position (yard line) of the ball.
LCD Display

to go edit
nn*
nn = current setting

Action
Enter the number of yards to go for a first down
and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return
to the game.

Down +1
LCD Display

down +1
n
n = current setting

Football Options

Action
Press  to manually increment the
down number.
A prompt showing down number displays briefly.

109

Ball On
The  key is used to manually enter the field position (yard line) of the ball. If
Auto Calculate is on, SIDE OF FIELD must be selected first.
LCD Display

BALL ON nn*
nn = current setting

Action
If Auto Calculate is on, SIDE OF FIELD must be
selected first.
Enter the field position (yard line) of the ball and
press . If Auto Calculate is off, DOWN
and TO GO must also be manually updated.
Press  twice to clear changes and return to
the game.
Press  and  to blank the Ball On,
Down, and To Go sections of the scoreboard.

SIDE OF FIELD
1= ← 3= →

Selects the current side of field for ball placement.
Press 1 or the left arrow to set side of field to left.
Press 2 or the right arrow to set side of field to right.

BALL ON nn*
nn = current setting

Enter the field position (yard line) of the ball and
press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return to
the game.
Press  and  to blank the Ball On,
Down, and To Go sections of the scoreboard.

First & 10
The  key is used to set the down to 1 and yards to go to 10. If Auto Calculate is
on, this key is used with the  key.
Time Out
The home and guest  keys are used to decrement the number of time outs
remaining and start the time out clock. The scoreboard indicator is turned on when the type
of time out is selected (full or partial). The scoreboard indicator is turned off when the time
out clock expires or is stopped.

110

Football Options

Note 1: Only the types (full or partial) of time outs that were configured in the EDIT
SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection.
Note 2: The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs.
LCD Display

TIME OUT-HOME
FULL
n
n = current setting

Action
Press  to display the number of full time
outs remaining.
To accept the full time out and start the time out clock,
press . Full time out decrements.
To decline the selection of a full time out, press
. Full time out does not decrement.
Note: The up and down arrow keys can also be used
to select the full and partial time outs.

TIME OUT-HOME
PARTIAL n
n = current setting

Press  a second time to display the
number of partial time outs remaining.
To accept the partial time out and start the time out
clock, press . Partial time out decrements.
To decline the selection of a partial time out, press
. Partial time out does not decrement.
Note: The up and down arrow keys can also be used
to select the full and partial time outs.

TIME OUT-HOME
NO TIME OUTS

Football Options

This message appears when there are no time outs
left.

111

Score +1, +2, +3, +6, -1
The home and guest , ,  and  keys are
used to increment the team score and the  key is used to decrement the team
score. These keys will also blank the BALL ON, DOWN, and TO GO values when pressed.
LCD Display

TEAM SCORE-+1
HOME
nnn
nnn = current setting

Action
Press the appropriate score key to increment or
decrement the score for the home or guest team.
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new
value for the team score of the corresponding team.

Possession
The  keys turn the home and guest possession indicators on and off. If Auto
Calculate is on, PLAY DIRECTION and SIDE OF FIELD must also be selected.
LCD Display

HOME POSSESSION
ON

Action
If Auto Calculate is on, PLAY DIRECTION, SIDE
OF FIELD and BALL ON must also be selected.
Press the home or guest  key to turn on
the possession indicator for that team.

HOME POSSESSION
OFF

To turn off the possession indicator, press the same
 key a second time or press the opposite
 key.

PLAY DIRECTION
1= ← 3= →

Select the direction of play for the current series of
downs.
Press 1 or the left arrow to set play direction from
right to left.
Press 3 or the right arrow to set play direction from
left to right.
(Continued on next page)

112

Football Options

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

SIDE OF FIELD
1= ← 3= →

Action
Selects the current side of field for ball placement.
Press 1 or the left arrow to set side of field to left.
Press 3 or the right arrow to set side of field to right.

BALL ON nn*
nn = current setting

Enter the field position (yard line) of the ball and
press . If Auto Calculate is off, DOWN
and TO GO must also be manually updated.
Press  twice to clear changes and return
to the game.
Press  and  to blank the Ball
On, Down, and To Go sections of the scoreboard.

BALL ON nn ⎥→
DOWN n TO GO nn
nn = current setting

If Auto Calculate is on, the current settings for
BALL ON, DOWN and TO GO are displayed.
To accept the current settings, press .
To decline the selection of the current settings,
press .
To change the current settings, use the right and
left arrow keys to scroll to BALL ON, DOWN or TO
GO. Enter the correct value on the number pad and
press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return
to the game.

TO GO IS 0
EDIT OR 1st & 10

This prompt displays briefly if the TO GO value is
zero.
If the number of yards to go is actually zero, press
the  key.
If a short distance remains, enter the correct TO
GO value and press .
(Continued on next page)

Football Options

113

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

BALL ON nn
ILLEGAL VALUE
nn = current setting

Action
ILLEGAL VALUE displays when the BALL ON
value is greater than the CENTER FIELD value
entered in the settings menu.
Enter the correct field position (yard line) of the ball
and press . The down is automatically
set to 1 and the To Go yards set to 10.

Yards Rushing
Press  to manually enter the number of rushing yards gained or lost on
a play.
LCD Display

rushing -home
yards nn*
nn = current setting

rushing -home
1=gain 3=loss

Action
Enter the number of rushing yards gained or lost on
a play and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return
to the game.

Select gain or loss to add or subtract from total
rushing yards.
Press 1 for a gain.
Press 3 for a loss.

rushing -home
yds total nnn

A prompt showing total rushing yards displays
briefly.

nnn = current setting

114

Football Options

Yards Passing
Press  to manually enter the number of passing yards gained or lost on a
play.
LCD Display

passing -home
yards nn
nn = current setting

Action
Enter the number of passing yards gained or lost on a
play
and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return to
the game.

Passing -home
1=gain 3=loss

Select gain or loss to add or subtract from total
passing yards.
Press 1 for a gain.
Press 3 for a loss.

Passing -home
yds total nnn

A prompt showing total passing yards displays briefly.

nnn = current setting

First Downs +1
LCD Display

home +1
first downs nn
nn = current setting

Football Options

Action
Press  to manually increment the
number of first downs.
A prompt showing total first downs displays briefly.

115

8.2

Edit
The  key allows the user to select and edit the following scoreboard fields.
Press  and the key for the home or guest field to be edited.
Time Out
Note 1: Only the time outs configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the
LCD and available for selection.
Note 2: The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs.
LCD Display

TIME OUT-HOME
FULL
n*
n = current setting

Action
Press   for the home or guest
team to display the current setting of full time outs
remaining.
Enter the correct number of full time outs on the
number pad and press .

TIME OUT-HOME
PARTIAL n*
n = current setting

Press   for the home or guest
team a second time or the down arrow key to display
the current setting of full time outs remaining.
Enter the correct number of partial time outs on the
number pad and press .

Score +1, +2, +3, +6, -1
LCD Display

TEAM SCORE-EDIT
HOME
nnn*
nnn = current setting

Action
Press  and any of the  keys for the
home or guest team to display the current team
score setting.
Enter the correct team score on the number pad and
press .

116

Football Options

Quarter +1
LCD Display

quarter-EDIT
n*
n = current setting

Action
Press   to display the current
quarter setting.
Enter the correct quarter number on the number pad
and press . The full time outs may be reset.

Time Out On/Off
LCD Display

TIME OUTs-edit
FULL MM:SS
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

TIME OUT- edit
PARTIAL MM:SS
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Action
Press   to display the
current time setting for full time outs.
Enter the correct time on the number pad and press
.

Press  a second time or the
down arrow key to display the configured time for
partial time out length.
Enter the correct time on the number pad and press
.

Football Options

117

8.3

Menu
The  key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport. The
up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list. Pressing a key other
than , , the arrow keys, and other allowed keys exits the Menu function.
The MENU function should be used at the beginning of each new game to edit the Home and
Guest Rosters.
New Game
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW GAME?

Action
Press  to clear all of the program data for the
last game played or the game in progress and begin
running the selected sport.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

New Code
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW CODE?

Action
Press  to begin selection of a new code from
the ENTER CODE prompt.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

118

Football Options

Home Roster, Guest Roster
Home Roster and Guest Roster are entered in the same way. Home Roster is used as an
example.
LCD Display

MENU-ROSTER
SELECT HOME

Action

Press  or the right or left arrow key to select
the Home or Guest Roster submenu and show the
first prompt on the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

HOME-TEAM NAME
aaaaaaaaaaaaa*

The TEAM NAME (LL-2441) insert must be
installed to enter the Team Name Message
Center (TNMC) settings.
The TNMC is updated after each selection is
completed.
Use the COLUMNS, ROWS and STROKE keys to
select the WIDTH, HEIGHT and FONT of the
TNMC. The defaults are
48 columns, 8 rows and single stroke.
Enter up to fifteen (15) characters for the team
name and press .
Reinsert the FOOTBALL (LL-2437) insert to
continue.

Football Options

119

LCD Display

HOME-TEAM abbr
aaaaaaaaaa*

Action

The TEAM NAME (LL-2441) insert must be
installed to enter the Team Name Message
Center (TNMC) settings.
The TNMC is updated after each selection is
completed.
Use the COLUMNS, ROWS and STROKE keys to
select the WIDTH, HEIGHT and FONT of the
TNMC. The defaults are 48 columns, 8 rows and
single stroke.
Enter up to ten (10) characters for the team
abbreviation and press .
Reinsert the FOOTBALL (LL-2437) insert to
continue.

120

Football Options

Display Menu
The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the
brightness of the scoreboard.
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN ENTER
DISPLAY MENU?

Action
Press  to select the Display submenu and
show the first prompt on the LCD.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

MENU-DISPLAY RUN
SEG TIMER Y/N

Note: The segment timer function is disabled while
the clock is running.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.

EXIT GAME
ARE YOU SURE Y/N

Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.
This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit the
sport code and enter the segment timer
The SEGMENT TIMER (LL-2475) insert must be
installed to enter the Segment Timer settings.
Refer to Section 3 for more information on the
Segment Timer.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.
(Continued on next page)

Football Options

121

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

Action

MENU- Dimming
level (0-9): nn%
nn = current level
None = bright
90% =
80% =
70% =
60% =
50% =
40% =
30% =
20% =
10% =

<0>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>

Press <0> through <9> or use the arrow keys <Í>
<Î>, to select the intensity for the digits on the
scoreboard.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data, and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key <Ð> to scroll to the next
selection.
Note: Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products.
Indoor LED and incandescent products only support
one level of dimming at 50%.

Edit Settings
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
edit SETTINGS?

Action
Press  or the right or left arrow key to select the
Settings submenu and show the first prompt on the
LCD.
Refer to Section 8.4.
Press  to resume the game in progress using the
current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

122

Football Options

Time of Day
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
SELECT TOD?

Action
Press  or the right arrow key to select the
Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on
the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*12, 2-24 HOUR

Press <1> or <2> to display the time of day in 12
hour (default) or 24 hour format.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
TOD hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss = current setting

Enter the time of day in hours, minutes, and
seconds using the selected format on the number
pad and press .
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*GAME 2-tod
* = current setting

MENU-TIME OF DAY
BLANK GAME DATA?

Football Options

Press <1> or <2> to display the game clock
(default) or the time of day clock on the scoreboard.
Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and
return to the game.

If 2-tod is selected, this message will be displayed.
Press  to blank all game data on the
scoreboard except for the Time of Day digits.

123

8.4

Settings
The user can edit the following settings when EDIT SETTINGS has been selected from the
Main Menu.
Main Clock
Note 1: The settings entered for Main Clock are used with the  key.
Note 2: The period, break, and overtime lengths are used differently depending on the
direction of the main clock. For count down, the main clock is set to the selected length,
decrements towards zero, and stops at zero. For count up, the main clock is set to zero,
increments towards the selected length, and stops when the selected length is reached.
LCD Display

MAIN CLOCK-MODE
TENTH SECOND? n
n = current setting

Action
When the main clock is set to count down and tenths
of a second is selected, the main clock displays in
tenths of a second remaining when the time is below
one minute.
Press  to set the main clock to display tenths
of a second.
Press  to display whole seconds.

MAIN CLOCK-TIME
PERIOD mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Enter the correct amount of time per period in
minutes and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 15:00 per quarter.
Note: Pressing  to select the period time
as the main clock setting will increment the current
period number if the clock value was previously zero.

MAIN CLOCK-TIME
BREAK mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Set the amount of time between periods.
Enter the correct amount of time for break length in
minutes and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 1:00.
(Continued on next page)

124

Football Options

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

MAIN CLOCK-TIME
OVERTIME mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Action
Set the amount of time for the overtime periods.
Enter the correct amount of time for overtime periods
in minutes and seconds on the number pad and
press .
For example, 5:00.

Play Clock
The PLAY CLOCK setting is used by the remote play clock console.
Note 1: When RESET ON STOP is set to yes (Y) the STOP switch automatically resets the
play clock using the RESET 1 time and the RESET button uses the RESET 2 time.
Note 2: When RESET ON STOP is set to no (N) the STOP switch does not reset the play
clock and the RESET button uses the RESET 1 time.
LCD Display

Play CLOCK-TIME
RESET 1 mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Action
Enter the correct amount of reset time in minutes
and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 00:25.

Play CLOCK-TIME
RESET 2 mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Enter the correct amount of reset time in minutes
and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 00:40.

Play CLOCK
RESET on stop?

Press  to automatically reset the play clock
when the  button on the remote play clock
control console is pressed.
Press  to disable this feature.

Football Options

125

Time Outs
Note 1: If a full or partial time out is not needed for the HOME or GUEST 
keys, enter zero for the number of time outs.
Note 2: If a full or partial time out is not needed for , enter zero for
the time.
Note 3: The number for each type of time out must be manually entered for an overtime
period using the   key sequence for each team.
LCD Display

TIME OUTS-MODE
FULL
n
n = current setting

TIME OUTS-TIME
FULL mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Action
Enter the number of full time outs per half on the
number pad and press . The number of full
time outs is automatically reset to this value at
halftime.

Enter the amount of time for a full time out in minutes
and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 1:00.

TIME OUTS-MODE
WARNING mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

A warning horn can be configured to signal the end
of a full/partial time out. While the time out clock is
counting down, the horn will sound for one second
when the warning time is reached. Enter a zero for
the time to disable the warning horn.
Enter the time in minutes and seconds on the
number pad and press .

TIME OUTS-MODE
PARTIAL n

Enter the number of partial time outs on the number
pad and press .

n = current setting

TIME OUTS-TIME
PARTIAL mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Enter the amount of time for a partial time out in
minutes and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 00:20
(Continued on next page)

126

Football Options

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

TIME OUTS-MODE
SHOW ON MAIN? n
n = current setting

Action
Press  to display the time out time on the LCD
and the main clock digits of the scoreboard while the
time out clock is active.
Press  to display the time out time on the LCD
only.

Center of Field Yard Line
LCD Display

Center field-set
Yards nn
nn = current setting

Action
Enter the value of the correct center field yard line on
the number pad and press .
Note: This value is used with the Auto Calculate
function to calculate Ball On and To Go values the
center of the field is crossed.

Auto Calculate
LCD Display

BALL ON-MODE
AUTO CALCULATE?

Action
Press  to enable the Auto Ball On - To Go
calculation. The number of yards to go and the
correct down are automatically calculated and
displayed.
Press  to disable this feature and manually
enter the down and the number of yards to go.

Football Options

127

Select Captions
LCD Display

Select captions
On 1 ← → 2 off

Action
This menu option allows for the controlled backlit
captions to be turned ON/OFF.
Press the <1> key to select ON and OFF for
captions controlled by control #1.
Press the <2> key to select ON and OFF for
captions controlled by control #2.

Score by Quarter
LCD Display

Score by Quarter
Y/N? X
X = current setting

Action
This feature allows for scores to be recorded by
quarter. This data is available on the RTD output.
Press  to score by quarter or press  to
not score by quarter.
Note: If this feature is enabled, all scores are
edited by quarter. Use this function only when
needed.

Switch Output
The All Sport 5000 series console has a switch that can be used to drive a number of different
devices. The switch can be configured to operate under different settings. The default
setting is 1-CLOCK= 0.
To display the switch setting that you want to select:
Press the number (0,1,2,3) key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to
the desired setting.
Press  to select the new setting.
Press  or the down arrow key to leave the switch setting and display the next prompt
(refer to the menu on the following page).

128

Football Options

The possible settings for the switch output are as follows:
Setting

Result

0-DISABLED

The switch remains open at all times and any
external devices are disabled.

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
0-DISABLED?
n = current setting

1-CLOCK = 0

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
1-CLOCK =0?
n = current setting

2-CLOCK STOP

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
2-CLOCK STOP?

In count down mode, the switch closes when the
main clock reaches zero and remains closed until a
nonzero value is entered.
In count up mode, the switch closes when the main
clock reaches the proper period, break, or overtime
length and opens when any other value is entered.

The switch closes when the main clock is stopped
and opens when the main clock is running. External
devices are disabled when the main clock is running.

n = current setting

3-MAIN HORN

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
3-MAIN HORN?

The switch closes when the main horn sounds. This
could be when Auto Horn is enabled and the main
clock reaches zero or when  is pressed.

n = current setting

Football Options

129

Default Settings
Write the settings for this installation in the space (Custom) provided.

130

Setting

Default

Tenth of a Second

No

Period Length

8:00

Break Length

10:00

Overtime Length

5:00

Play Clock Reset 1

0:25

Play Clock Reset 2

0:25

Play Clock Reset
On Stop

No

Full Time Outs

3

Full Time Out

1:00

Partial Time Outs

0

Partial Time Out

0:00

Center of Field

50

Auto Calculate

Yes

Switch Output

1-Clock = 0

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

Football Options

Section 9:

Hockey Operations

Sport Insert: LL-2436
The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section. The Team Name insert and Block
Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A. The Quick Reference is located in Appendix D.
Reference Drawings:
Insert, Hockey .....................................................................................................Drawing A-124218
Block Diagrams, A/S5000/3000 Hockey.............................................................Drawing A-124689
Insert, Team Name .............................................................................................Drawing A-125290
Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert. Read Section 2
carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions.
If an insert is lost or damaged, a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be
used until a replacement can be ordered.
Use the labels provided in Appendix B to attach the correct code number label to the sport insert in
the appropriate location. Write the code number in the space provided below.
Write the correct code number here.

If you do not know the code number to enter for your scoreboard, refer to Appendix B in this
manual. If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard, refer to the Installation and
Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard.

9.1

Shots on Goal Console Operation
Enter code 4000 to use the All Sport 5000 console as a shots-on-goal console. All keys other
than Home and Guest Shots on Goal +1 Goal -1 will be disabled.

9.2

Hockey Keys
Time Out On/Off
 stops and starts the time out clock. The length of both the full and
partial time outs can also be changed when the time out clock is stopped.
Note 1: Only the time outs configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the
LCD and available for selection (please refer to the table on the following page).
Note 2: The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs.

Hockey Options

131

LCD Display

TIME OUT-SELECT
FULL MM:SS
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Action
Press  to display the
configured time for full time out length.
To accept the full time out length, press .
To decline the selection of the full time out length,
press .
To change the full time out length, enter the new
length in minutes and seconds on the number pad
and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return to
the game.

TIME OUT-SELECT
PARTIAL MM:SS
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Press  a second time to
display the configured time for partial time out length.
To accept the partial time out length, press .
To decline the selection of the partial time out length,
press .
To change the partial time out length, enter the new
length in minutes and seconds on the number pad
and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return to
the game.

Enable Penalty Clocks
Press  to allow the penalty clocks to count when the main
clock is on.
Disable Penalty Clocks
Press  to disable the penalty clocks from counting when
the main clock is on.
Minor/Major Penalty
The  and  are used to enter the penalty time
when  is selected. Refer to Subsection Player Penalty.

132

Hockey Options

Period +1
LCD Display

period +1
n
n = current setting

Action
Press  to increment the period number.
A prompt showing period number displays briefly.

Penalty
LCD Display

Action

HOME penalty
ON

Press the home or guest key, to turn on
the penalty indicator for that team.

HOME penalty
OFF

To turn off the penalty indicator, press the same
 key a second time.

Time Out
The home and guest  keys are used to decrement the number of time outs
remaining and start the time out clock. The scoreboard indicator is turned on when the type
of time out is selected (full or partial). The scoreboard indicator is turned off when the time
out clock expires or is stopped.
Note 1: Only the types (full or partial) of time outs that were configured in the EDIT
SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection (please refer to the
table on the following page).
Note 2:The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs.

Hockey Options

133

LCD Display

TIME OUT-HOME
FULL?
n
n = current setting

Action
Press  to display the number of full time
outs remaining.
To accept the full time out and start the time out clock,
press . Full time out decrements.
To decline the selection of a full time out, press .
Full time out does not decrement.
Note: The up and down arrow keys can also be used to
select the full and partial time outs.

TIME OUT-HOME
PARTIAL? n
n = current setting

Press  a second time to display the
number of partial time outs remaining.
To accept the partial time out and start the time out
clock, press . Partial time out decrements.
To decline the selection of a partial time out, press
. Partial time out does not decrement.
Note: The up and down arrow keys can also be used to
select the full and partial time outs.

TIME OUT-HOME
NO TIME OUTS

134

This message appears when there are no time outs left.

Hockey Options

Player Penalty
LCD Display

home plyr/pen
1 pnn pn nn:nn
nn = current setting

Action
Press  to add a new penalty or
edit an existing penalty for the home or guest team.
To edit an existing penalty, use the up and down arrow
keys to scroll to the desired penalty and press
.
Enter the jersey number of the player with the penalty
on the number pad and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return to
the game.

home plyr/pen
1 pnn pn mm:ss
nn = player number
mm:ss = penalty time

Hockey Options

The default penalty time initially displayed is the minor
penalty value that was entered in Settings.
Enter the penalty time by pressing the  or  key or use the
number pad to enter the correct penalty time and then
press . Pressing  or
 additional times will add the
configured time for that penalty with each press. Press
the  to clear the penalty time if  or  are pressed too
many times.

135

Set Main Clock
LCD Display

MAIN CLOCK -SET
CURR mm:ss.t*
mm:ss.t = minutes, seconds,
tenths of a second

Action
After the main clock has been stopped, press
 to display the current time of
the main clock.
To change the time, enter the desired time on the
number pad and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return
to the game.

Adjust penalty
timers y/n*

If there are penalty times and the  has
been pressed at least once after setting the period
time, the Adjust Penalty timers question will be
displayed. A  response will adjust all penalty
timers to the correct time based on the time entered
for the main clock. A response, will not
change the penalty timers.

Score, Shots on Goal and Saves
The home and guest ,  and 
keys are all used to increment and decrement their respective totals. Score is used as an
example.
LCD Display

TEAM score-edit
HOME
nnn
nnn = current setting

Action
Press the appropriate key to increment or decrement
the total for the home or guest team. For example,
.
Enter the correct number on the number pad and
press .
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new
value for the team score of the corresponding team.

136

Hockey Options

Clear All Penalties
Press  to delete all of the penalties for the home or guest team.
LCD Display

HOME PLYR/PEN
CLEAR ALL Y/N?

Action
Press  to clear the penalties for all players in
the roster.
Press  to decline the selection and return to the
game.

Delete Penalty
Press  to delete a single penalty for the home or guest team.
LCD Display

home del pen?
1 pnn pn nn:nn
nn = current setting

9.3

Action
Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll to the
correct penalty and press .
Press  to decline the selection and return to
the game.

Edit
The  key allows the user to select and edit the following scoreboard fields.
Press  and the key for the home or guest field to be edited.
Time Out
Note 1: Only the time outs configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the
LCD and available for selection (please refer to the table on the following page).
Note 2: The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs.

Hockey Options

137

LCD Display

TIME OUT-HOME
FULL
n*
n = current setting

Action
Press   for the home or guest
team to display the current setting of partial time outs
remaining.
Enter the correct number of full time outs on the
number pad and press .

TIME OUT-HOME
PARTIAL n*
n = current setting

Press   for the home or guest
team a second time or the down arrow key to display
the current setting of full time outs remaining.
Enter the correct number of partial time outs on the
number pad and press .

Score, Shots on Goal and Saves
The home and guest ,  and
 keys are all edited in the same way. Score is used as an example.
LCD Display

TEAM score-edit
HOME
nnn
nnn = current setting

Action
Press  and the appropriate statistic key to
display the current setting. For example, .
Enter the correct number on the number pad and
press .

Period +1
LCD Display

period-EDIT
n*
n = current setting

138

Action
Press   to display the current
period setting.
Enter the correct quarter number on the number pad
and press . The full time outs are reset.

Hockey Options

Time Out On/Off
LCD Display

TIME OUTs-edit
FULL MM:SS
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

TIME OUT- edit
PARTIAL MM:SS
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Action
Press   to display the
current time setting for full time outs.
Enter the correct time on the number pad and press
.

Press  a second time or the
down arrow key to display the configured time for
partial time out length.
Enter the correct time on the number pad and press
.

9.4

Menu
The  key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport. The
up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list. Pressing a key other
than , , the arrow keys, and other allowed keys exits the Menu function.
The Menu function should be used at the beginning of each new game to edit the Home and
Guest Rosters.
New Game
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW GAME?

Action
Press  to clear all of the program data for the
last game played or the game in progress and begin
running the selected sport.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Hockey Options

139

New Code
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW CODE?

Action
Press  to begin selection of a new code from
the ENTER CODE prompt.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Home Roster, Guest Roster
Home Roster and Guest Roster are entered in the same way. Home Roster is used as an
example.
LCD Display

MENU-ROSTER
SELECT HOME

Action
Press  or the right or left arrow key to select
the Home or Guest Roster submenu and show the
first prompt on the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

HOME-TEAM NAME
aaaaaaaaaaaaa*

The TEAM NAME (LL-2441) insert must be
inserted to enter the Team Name Message
Center (TNMC) settings.
The TNMC is updated after each selection is
completed.
Use the COLUMNS, ROWS and STROKE keys to
select the WIDTH, HEIGHT and FONT of the
TNMC. The defaults are 48 columns, 8 rows and
single stroke.
Enter up to fifteen (15) characters for the team
name and press .
Reinsert the HOCKEY (LL-2436) insert to
continue.
(Continued on next page)

140

Hockey Options

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

HOME-TEAM abbr
aaaaaaaaaa*

Action
The TEAM NAME (LL-2441) insert must be
inserted to enter the Team Name Message
Center (TNMC) settings.
The TNMC is updated after each selection is
completed.
Use the COLUMNS, ROWS and STROKE keys to
select the WIDTH, HEIGHT and FONT of the
TNMC. The defaults are 48 columns, 8 rows and
single stroke.
Enter up to ten (10) characters for the team
abbreviation and press .
Reinsert the HOCKEY (LL-2436) insert to
continue.

Display Menu
The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the
brightness of the scoreboard.
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN ENTER
DISPLAY MENU?

Action
Press  to select the Display submenu and
show the first prompt on the LCD.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Hockey Options

141

LCD Display

Action

MENU-DISPLAY RUN
SEG TIMER Y/N

Note: The segment timer function is disabled
while the clock is running.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.

EXIT GAME
ARE YOU SURE Y/N

This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit the
sport code and enter the segment timer
The SEGMENT TIMER (LL-2475) insert must be
inserted to enter the Segment Timer settings.
Refer to Section 3 for more information on the
Segment Timer.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.

MENU- Dimming
level (0-9): nn%
nn = current level
None = bright
90% =
80% =
70% =
60% =
50% =
40% =
30% =
20% =
10% =

142

<0>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>

Press <0> through <9> or use the arrow keys <Í>
<Î>, to select the intensity for the digits on the
scoreboard.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data, and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key <Ð> to scroll to the next
selection.
Note: Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products.
Indoor LED and incandescent products only support
one level of dimming at 50%.

Hockey Options

Edit Settings
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
edit SETTINGS?

Action
Press  or the right or left arrow key to select the
Settings submenu and show the first prompt on the
LCD.
Refer to Section 9.5 Settings.
Press  to resume the game in progress using the
current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Time of Day
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
SELECT TOD?

Action
Press  or the right arrow key to select the
Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on
the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*12, 2-24 HOUR

Press <1> or <2> to display the time of day in 12
hour (default) or 24 hour format.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
TOD hh:mm:ss*
hh:mm:ss = current setting

Enter the time of day in hours, minutes, and
seconds using the selected format on the number
pad and press .
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*GAME 2-tod
* = current setting

Hockey Options

Press <1> or <2> to display the game clock
(default) or the time of day clock on the scoreboard.
Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and
return to the game.

143

LCD Display

MENU-TIME OF DAY
BLANK GAME DATA?

9.5

Action
If 2-tod is selected, this message will be displayed.
Press  to blank all game data on the
scoreboard except for the Time of Day digits.

Settings
The following settings can be edited by the user when EDIT SETTINGS has been selected
from the Main Menu.
Main Clock
Note 1: The settings entered for Main Clock are used with the  key.
Note 2: The period, break, and overtime lengths are used differently depending on the
direction of the main clock. For count down, the main clock is set to the selected length,
decrements towards zero, and stops at zero. For count up, the main clock is set to zero,
increments towards the selected length, and stops when the selected length is reached.
LCD Display

MAIN CLOCK-MODE
TENTH SECOND? n
n = current setting

Action
When the main clock is set to count down and
tenths of a second is selected, the main clock
displays in tenths of a second remaining when the
time is below one minute.
Press  to set the main clock to display tenths
of a second.
Press  to display whole seconds.

MAIN CLOCK-TIME
PERIOD mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Enter the correct amount of time per period in
minutes and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 20:00 per period.
Note: Pressing  to select the period time
as the main clock setting will increment the current
period number if the clock value was previously
zero.
(Continued on next page)

144

Hockey Options

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

Action

'

MAIN CLOCK-TIME
BREAK mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Set the amount of time between periods.
Enter the correct amount of time for break length in
minutes and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 1:00.

MAIN CLOCK-TIME
OVERTIME mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Set the amount of time for the overtime periods.
Enter the correct amount of time for overtime
periods
in minutes and seconds on the number pad and
press .
For example, 5:00.

Penalty Times
Default times can be set for the minor and major penalty keys. The minor penalty time is
used as the default when first entering the player penalty function.
LCD Display

Penalty time
minor mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Action
Enter the correct default time for a minor penalty in
minutes and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 02:00.
The minor penalty time is used as the default when
first entering the player penalty function.

Penalty time
major mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Enter the correct default time for a major penalty in
minutes and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 02:00.

Hockey Options

145

Time Outs
Note 1: If a full or partial time out is not needed for the HOME or GUEST 
keys, enter zero for the number of time outs.
Note 2: If a full or partial time out is not needed for , enter zero for
the time.
Note 3: The number for each type of time out must be manually entered for an overtime
period using the   key sequence for each team (please refer to the
menu on the following page).
LCD Display

TIME OUTS-MODE
FULL
n*

Action
Enter the number of full time outs on the number pad
and press .

n = current setting

TIME OUTS-TIME
FULL mm:ss*
mm:ss = current setting

Enter the amount of time for a full time out in minutes
and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 1:00.

TIME OUTS-MODE
WARNING mm:ss*
mm:ss = current setting

A warning horn can be configured to signal the end
of a full/partial time out. While the time out clock is
counting down, the horn will sound for one second
when the warning time is reached. Enter a zero for
the time to disable the warning horn.
Enter the time in minutes and seconds on the
number pad and press .

TIME OUTS-MODE
PARTIAL n*

Enter the number of partial time outs on the number
pad and press .

n = current setting

TIME OUTS-TIME
PARTIAL mm:ss*
mm:ss = current setting

Enter the amount of time for a partial time out in
minutes and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 00:20
(Continued on next page)

146

Hockey Options

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

TIME OUTS-MODE
SHOW ON MAIN? n
n = current setting

Action
Press  to display the time out time on the LCD
and the main clock digits of the scoreboard while the
time out clock is active.
Press  to display the time out time on the LCD
only.

Select Captions
LCD Display

Select captions
on 1 ← → 2 off

Action
This menu option allows for the controlled backlit
captions to be turned ON/OFF.
Press the <1> key to select ON and OFF for captions
controlled by control #1.
Press the <2> key to select ON and OFF for captions
controlled by control #2.

Switch Output
The All Sport 5000 series console has a switch that can be used to drive a number of different
devices. The switch can be configured to operate under different settings.
The default setting is 1-CLOCK= 0.
To display the switch setting that you want to select:
Press the number (0,1,2,3) key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to
the desired setting.
Press  to select the new setting.
Press  or the down arrow key to leave the switch setting and display the next prompt.
The possible settings for the switch output are on the following page:

Hockey Options

147

Setting

Result

0-DISABLED

The switch remains open at all times and any
external devices are disabled.

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
0-DISABLED?
n = current setting

1-CLOCK = 0

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
1-CLOCK =0?
n = current setting

In count down mode, the switch closes when the
main clock reaches zero and remains closed until a
nonzero value is entered.
In count up mode, the switch closes when the main
clock reaches the proper period, break, or overtime
length and opens when any other value is entered.

2-CLOCK STOP

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
2-CLOCK STOP?

The switch closes when the main clock is stopped
and opens when the main clock is running. External
devices are disabled when the main clock is running.

n = current setting

3-MAIN HORN

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
3-MAIN HORN?

The switch closes when the main horn sounds. This
could be when Auto Horn is enabled and the main
clock reaches zero or when  is pressed.

n = current setting

Default Settings
Write the settings for this installation in the space (Custom) provided.
Setting

148

Default

Tenth of a Second

Yes

Period Length

20:00

Break Length

15:00

Overtime Length

5:00

Minor Penalty

2:00

Major Penalty

5:00

Full Time Outs

1

Full Time Out

1:00

Partial Time Outs

0

Partial Time Out

0:00

Switch Output

1-Clock = 0

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

Hockey Options

Section 10: Soccer Operations
Sport Insert: LL-2440
The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section. The Team Name insert and Block
Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A. The Quick Reference is located in Appendix D.
Reference Drawings:
Block Diagrams, A/S5000/3000, Outdoor Sports ................................................ Drawing A-124690
Insert, Soccer ....................................................................................................... Drawing A-125215
Insert, Team Name .............................................................................................. Drawing A-125290
Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert. Read Section 2
carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions.
If an insert is lost or damaged, a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be
used until a replacement can be ordered.
Use the labels provided in Appendix B to attach the correct code number label to the sport insert in
the appropriate location. Write the code number in the space provided below.
Write the correct code number here.

If you do not know the code number to enter for your scoreboard, refer to Appendix B in this
manual. If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard, refer to the Installation and
Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard.

Soccer Operations

149

10.1 Soccer Keys
Time Out On/Off
 stops and starts the time out clock. The length of both the full and
partial time outs can also be changed when the time out clock is stopped.
LCD Display

TIME OUT-SELECT
FULL MM:SS
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Action
Press  to display the configured
time for full time out length.
To accept the full time out length and press .
To decline the selection of the full time out length,
press .
To change the full time out length, enter the new
length in minutes and seconds on the number pad
and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return to
the game.
Notes: Only the time outs configured in the EDIT
SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and
available for selection.
The up and down arrow keys can also be used to
select the full and partial time outs.
(Continued on next page)

150

Soccer Options

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

TIME OUT-SELECT
PARTIAL MM:SS
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Action
Press  a second time to display
the configured time for partial time out length.
To accept the partial time out length and press
.
To decline the selection of the partial time out length,
press .
To change the partial time out length, enter the new
length in minutes and seconds on the number pad
and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return to
the game.
Notes: Only the time outs configured in the EDIT
SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and
available for selection.
The up and down arrow keys can also be used to
select the full and partial time outs.

Half +1
LCD Display

Half; +1
n
n = current setting

Soccer Operations

Action
Press  to increment the half number.
A prompt showing period number will display briefly.

151

Time Out
The home and guest  keys are used to decrement the number of time outs
remaining and start the time out clock. The scoreboard indicator is turned on when the type
of time out is selected (full or partial). The scoreboard indicator is turned off when the time
out clock expires or is stopped.
Note 1: Only the types (full or partial) of time outs that were configured in the EDIT
SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection.
Note 2: The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs.
LCD Display

TIME OUTs-HOME
FULL
n
n = current setting

Action
Press  to display the number of full time
outs remaining.
To accept the full time out and start the time out clock,
press . Full time out decrements.
To decline the selection of a full time out, press .
Full time out does not decrement.
Note: The up and down arrow keys can also be used to
select the full and partial time outs.

TIME OUTs-HOME
PARTIAL n
n = current setting

Press  a second time to display the
number of partial time outs remaining.
To accept the partial time out and start the time out
clock, press . Partial time out decrements.
To decline the selection of a partial time out, press
. Partial time out does not decrement.
Note: The up and down arrow keys can also be used to
select the full and partial time outs.

TIME OUTs-HOME
NO TIME OUTS

152

This message appears when there are no time outs left.

Soccer Options

Score +1, -1
The home and guest  and  keys are used to increment and
decrement the team score.
LCD Display

TEAM SCORE: +1
HOME
nnn
nnn = current setting

Action
Press the appropriate score key to increment or
decrement the score for the home or guest team.
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new
value for the team score of the corresponding team.

Other Increment and Decrement Keys
The home and guest , , ,
 and  keys are all edited in the same way. Saves is
used as an example.
LCD Display

saves: +1
HOME nn
nnn = current setting

Action
Press the appropriate key to increment or decrement
the statistics for the home or guest team. For example,
.
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new
value for the corresponding team.

10.2 Edit
The  key allows the user to select and edit the following scoreboard fields.
Press  and the key for the home or guest field to be edited.
Half +1
LCD Display

half: EDIT
n*
n = current setting

Soccer Operations

Action
Press   to display the current quarter
setting.
Enter the correct half number on the number pad and
press . The full time outs are reset.

153

Time Out On/Off
LCD Display

TIME OUTs-edit
FULL MM:SS
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

TIME OUTs-edit
PARTIAL MM:SS
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Action
Press   to display the
current time setting for full time outs.
Enter the correct time on the number pad and press
.

Press  a second time or the
down arrow key to display the configured time for
partial time out length.
Enter the correct time on the number pad and press
.

Time Out
Note 1: Only the time outs configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the
LCD and available for selection.
Note 2: The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs.
LCD Display

TIME OUT-HOME
FULL
n*
n = current setting

Action
Press   for the home or guest
team to display the current setting of full time outs
remaining.
Enter the correct number of full time outs on the
number pad and press .

TIME OUT-HOME
PARTIAL n*
n = current setting

Press   for the home or guest
team a second time or the down arrow key to display
the current setting of full time outs remaining.
Enter the correct number of partial time outs on the
number pad and press .

154

Soccer Options

Score +1, -1
LCD Display

TEAM SCORE: EDIT
HOME
nnn*
nnn = current setting

Action
Press  and either of the SCORE keys for the
home or guest team to display the current team
score setting.
Enter the correct team score on the number pad and
press .

Other Increment and Decrement Keys
The home and guest , , ,
 and  keys are all edited in the same way. Saves is
used as an example.
LCD Display

saves: edit
HOME nn
nnn = current setting

Action
Press  and the appropriate statistic key to
display the current setting. For example, .
Enter the correct number on the number pad and press
.

10.3 Menu
The  key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport. The
up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list. Pressing a key other
than , , the arrow keys, and other allowed keys exits the Menu function.
The Menu function should be used at the beginning of each new game to edit the Home and
Guest Rosters.

Soccer Operations

155

New Game
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW GAME?

Action
Press  to clear all of the program data for the
last game played or the game in progress and begin
running the selected sport.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

New Code
When the LCD Display is as shown, the following actions may be selected.
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW CODE?

Action
Press  to begin selection of a new code from
the ENTER CODE prompt.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Home Roster, Guest Roster
Home Roster and Guest Roster are entered in the same way. Home Roster is used as an
example.
LCD Display

MENU-ROSTER
SELECT HOME

Action
Press  or the right or left arrow key to select
the Home or Guest Roster submenu and show the
first prompt on the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.
(Continued on next page)

156

Soccer Options

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

HOME-TEAM NAME
aaaaaaaaaaaaa*

Action
The TEAM NAME (LL-2441) insert must be
inserted to enter the Team Name Message
Center (TNMC) settings.
The TNMC is updated after each selection is
completed.
Use the COLUMNS, ROWS and STROKE keys to
select the WIDTH, HEIGHT and FONT of the
TNMC. The defaults are 48 columns, 8 rows and
single stroke.
Enter up to fifteen (15) characters for the team
name and press .
Reinsert the SOCCER (LL-2440) insert to
continue.

HOME-TEAM abbr
aaaaaaaaaa*

The TEAM NAME (LL-2441) insert must be
inserted to enter the Team Name Message
Center (TNMC) settings.
The TNMC is updated after each selection is
completed.
Use the COLUMNS, ROWS and STROKE keys to
select the WIDTH, HEIGHT and FONT of the
TNMC. The defaults are 48 columns, 8 rows and
single stroke.
Enter up to ten (10) characters for the team
abbreviation and press .
Reinsert the SOCCER (LL-2440) insert to
continue.

Display Menu
The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the
brightness of the scoreboard.
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN ENTER
DISPLAY MENU?

Action
Press  to select the Display submenu and
show the first prompt on the LCD.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Soccer Operations

157

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

Action

MENU-DISPLAY RUN
SEG TIMER Y/N

Note: The segment timer function is disabled while
the clock is running.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.

EXIT GAME
ARE YOU SURE Y/N

This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit the
sport code and enter the segment timer.
The SEGMENT TIMER (LL-2475) insert must be
inserted to enter the Segment Timer settings.
Refer to Section 3 for more information on the
segment timer.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.

MENU- Dimming
level (0-9): nn%
nn = current level
None = bright
90% =
80% =
70% =
60% =
50% =
40% =
30% =
20% =
10% =

158

<0>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>

Press <0> through <9> or use the arrow keys <Í>
<Î>, to select the intensity for the digits on the
scoreboard.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data, and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key <Ð> to scroll to the next
selection.
Note: Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products.
Indoor LED and incandescent products only support
one level of dimming at 50%.

Soccer Options

Settings
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
edit SETTINGS?

Action
Press  or the right or left arrow key to select
the Edit Settings submenu and show the first
prompt on the LCD.
Refer to Section 10.4.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Time of Day
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
SELECT TOD?

Action
Press  or the right arrow key to select the
Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on
the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*12, 2-24 HOUR

Press <1> or <2> to display the time of day in 12
hour (default) or 24 hour format.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
TOD hh:mm:ss*
hh:mm:ss = current setting

Enter the time of day in hours, minutes, and
seconds using the selected format on the number
pad and press .
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.
(Continued on next page)

Soccer Operations

159

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*GAME 2-tod
* = current setting

MENU-TIME OF DAY
BLANK GAME DATA?

10.4

Action
Press <1> or <2> to display the game clock
(default) or the time of day clock on the scoreboard.
Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and
return to the game.

If 2-tod is selected, this message will be displayed.
Press  to blank all game data on the
scoreboard except for the Time of Day digits.

Settings
The following settings can be edited by the user when EDIT SETTINGS has been selected
from the Main Menu.
Main Clock
Note 1: The settings entered for Main Clock are used with the  key.
Note 2: The period, break, and overtime lengths are used differently depending on the
direction of the main clock. For count down, the main clock is set to the selected length,
decrements towards zero, and stops at zero. For count up, the main clock is set to zero,
increments towards the selected length, and stops when the selected length is reached.
LCD Display

MAIN CLOCK-TIME
PERIOD mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Action
Enter the correct amount of time per period in
minutes and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 20:00 per period.
Note: Pressing  to select the period time
as the main clock setting will increment the current
period number if the clock value was previously
zero.
(Continued on next page)

160

Soccer Options

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

MAIN CLOCK-TIME
BREAK mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Action
Set the amount of time between periods.
Enter the correct amount of time for break length
in minutes and seconds on the number pad and
press .
For example, 1:00.

Corner Kicks, Saves, or Fouls
Select whether to display corner kicks, saves, or fouls on the scoreboard.
LCD Display

corner,save,foul
1-* 2- 3-

Action
Press <1>, <2>, or <3> to display Corner Kicks
(default), Saves, or Fouls on the scoreboard.

= current setting

Time Outs
Note 1: If a full or partial time out is not needed for the HOME or GUEST 
keys, enter zero for the number of time outs.
Note 2: If a full or partial time out is not needed for , enter zero for
the time.
Note 3: The number for each type of time out must be manually entered for an overtime
period using the   key sequence for each team (please refer to the table
on the following page).

Soccer Operations

161

LCD Display

TIME OUTS-MODE
FULL
n

Action
Enter the number of full time outs on the number
pad and press .

n = current setting

TIME OUTS-TIME
FULL mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Enter the amount of time for a full time out in
minutes and seconds on the number pad and
press .
For example, 1:00.

TIME OUTS-MODE
WARNING mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

A warning horn can be configured to signal the end
of a full/partial time out. While the time out clock is
counting down, the horn will sound for one second
when the warning time is reached. Enter a zero
for the time to disable the warning horn.
Enter the time in minutes and seconds on the
number pad and press .

TIME OUTS-MODE
PARTIAL n

Enter the number of partial time outs on the
number pad and press .

n = current setting

TIME OUTS-TIME
PARTIAL mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Enter the amount of time for a partial time out in
minutes and seconds on the number pad and
press .
For example, 00:20

TIME OUTS-MODE
SHOW ON MAIN? n
n = current setting

Press  to display the time out time on the
LCD and the main clock digits of the scoreboard
while the time out clock is active.
Press  to display the time out time on the
LCD only.

162

Soccer Options

Display Penalty/TOL
LCD Display

Display Mode
Penalty* TOL

Action
This selection allows the operator to decide whether or
not to display the penalty or TOL on the penalty digits.
The asterisk sign (*) indicates current selection Use the
right or left arrow keys ( / ) or any number key to
change the selection, and then press .

Switch Output
The All Sport 5000 series console has a switch that can be used to drive a number of different
devices. The switch can be configured to operate under different settings. The default
setting is 1-CLOCK= 0.
To display the switch setting that you want to select:
Press the number (0,1,2,3) key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to
the desired setting.
Press  to select the new setting.
Press  or the down arrow key to leave the switch setting and display the next prompt
(please refer to table on the following page).

Soccer Operations

163

The possible settings for the switch output are as follows:
Setting

Result

0-DISABLED

The switch remains open at all times and any
external devices are disabled.

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
0-DISABLED?
n = current setting

1-CLOCK = 0

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
1-CLOCK =0?
n = current setting

In count down mode, the switch closes when the
main clock reaches zero and remains closed until a
nonzero value is entered.
In count up mode, the switch closes when the main
clock reaches the proper period, break, or overtime
length and opens when any other value is entered.

2-CLOCK STOP

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
2-CLOCK STOP?

The switch closes when the main clock is stopped
and opens when the main clock is running. External
devices are disabled when the main clock is running.

n = current setting

3-MAIN HORN

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
3-MAIN HORN?

The switch closes when the main horn sounds. This
could be when Auto Horn is enabled and the main
clock reaches zero or when  is pressed.

n = current setting

Default Settings
Write the settings for this installation in the space (Custom) provided.

164

Setting

Default

Period Length

45:00

Break Length

10:00

Corner Kick/Save

1 CORNER

Full Time Outs

2

Full Time Out

1:00

Partial Time Outs

0

Partial Time Out

00:00

Switch Output

1-Clock = 0

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

Soccer Options

Section 11: Tennis Operations
Sport Insert: LL-2483
The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section. The Team Name insert and Block
Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A.
Reference Drawings:
Block Diagrams, A/S5000/3000, Outdoor Sports ............................................. Drawing A-124690
Insert, Team Name ............................................................................................Drawing A-125290
Insert, Tennis .................................................................................................... Drawing A-131274
Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert. Read Section 2
carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions.
If an insert is lost or damaged, a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be
used until a replacement can be ordered.
Use the labels provided in Appendix B to attach the correct code number label to the sport insert in
the appropriate location. Write the code number in the space provided below.
Write the correct code number here.

If you do not know the code number to enter for your scoreboard, refer to Appendix B in this
manual. If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard, refer to the Installation and
Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard.

11.1 Tennis Keys
Serve
LCD Display

TOP SERVE
ON

Tennis Operations

Action
 turns the serve indicators on or off for
the respective player.

165

Matches Won +1
LCD Display

Matches won +1
Top nn

Action
Press  to increment the
matches won for the current team.

Nn = current matches won

Games Won
LCD Display

GAMES WON +1
TOP N

Action
Press  to increment the
number of games won in the current set for the
respective player.

Point
The  key increments the point value for the respective player. If Tie Break scoring
mode is selected, the points will increment by 1. Otherwise, the points will increment as 15,
30, 40 AD or GM. The current point values will be shown on the LCD.
Advantage
The advantage key sets an advantage score for the chosen player. The score digits for this
player will display AD. The opposite player score will display dashes (- -).
Note: The  key is disabled when Tie Break scoring mode is selected.
Deuce
The  key sets both scores to 40.
Note: The  key is disabled when Tie Break scoring mode is selected.
Tie Break
The  key sets the mode of scoring to Tie Break mode. In Tie Break scoring
mode, points for each player are incremented by one when the  key is pressed.
Note 1: Tie Break scoring mode may only be selected when both player point values are 0.
Note 2: To change scoring mode back to normal, use the reset game score key (please refer to
the table on the following page).

166

Tennis Operations

Reset Match
LCD Display

TOP=nn BOT=nn
RESET MATCH?
nnn = current setting

Action
Press  to reset the current match. All set
scores and current game score will be cleared and
the set number will be set to 1.

Reset Game Score
Press  to reset the player points values for the current game.
Match Number +1
LCD Display

MATCH +1
Nnnn

Action
Press  to increment the
current match number.

nnnn = current setting

Set +1
Press  to increment the current set number. The new set number and new set
games won values will be displayed on the LCD.

11.2 Edit
The  key allows the user to select and edit the following scoreboard fields.
Press  and the key for the home or guest field to be edited.

Tennis Operations

167

Games Won
LCD Display

GAMES WON EDIT
SET 1 TOP N

Action
Press   to edit the
number of games won in the current set for the
respective player.

nn = current setting
Press the up or down arrow keys to move through
the games won for sets other than the current set.
Press the number keys to edit any of these games
won values.

Points
LCD Display

TOP=nn BOT=nn
EDIT TOP
nn = current setting

Action
Press   to set the point value for
the respective player. The current editing score is
shown by the bottom line on the LCD.

Set +1
LCD Display

SET: EDIT
n

Action
Press   to edit the current set
number.

n = current setting

Match Number +1
LCD Display

MATCH: EDIT
nnnn

Action
Press   to edit the
current match number.

nnnn = current setting

168

Tennis Operations

Matches Won
LCD Display

Matches Won: EDIT
Top nn

Action
Press   to edit the
current matches won for the selected team.

Nn = current matches won

11.3 Menu
The  key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport. The
up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list. Pressing a key other
than , , the arrow keys, and other allowed keys, exit the Menu function.
The MENU function should be used at the beginning of each new game to edit the Home and
Guest Rosters.
New Game
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW GAME?

Action
Press  to clear all of the program data for the
last game played or the game in progress and begin
running the selected sport.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

New Code
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW CODE?

Action
Press  to begin selection of a new code from
the ENTER CODE prompt.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Tennis Operations

169

Home Roster, Guest Roster
Home Roster and Guest Roster are entered in the same way. Home Roster is used as an
example.
LCD Display

MENU-ROSTER
SELECT HOME

Action
Press  or the right or left arrow key to select
the Home or Guest Roster submenu and show the
first prompt on the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

HOME-TEAM NAME
aaaaaaaaaaaaa*

The TEAM NAME (LL-2441) insert must be
inserted to enter the Team Name Message
Center (TNMC) settings.
The TNMC is updated after each selection is
completed.
Use the COLUMNS, ROWS and STROKE keys to
select the WIDTH, HEIGHT and FONT of the
TNMC. The defaults are 48 columns, 8 rows and
single stroke.
Enter up to fifteen (15) characters for the team
name and press 
Reinsert the TENNIS (LL-2483) insert to
continue.

170

Tennis Operations

Display Menu
The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the
brightness of the scoreboard.
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN ENTER
DISPLAY MENU?

Action
Press  to select the Display submenu and
show the first prompt on the LCD.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

MENU-DISPLAY RUN
SEG TIMER Y/N

Note: The segment timer function is disabled while
the clock is running.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.

EXIT GAME
ARE YOU SURE Y/N

This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit the
sport code and enter the segment timer
The SEGMENT TIMER (LL-2475) insert must be
inserted to enter the Segment Timer settings.
Refer to Section 3 for more information on the
segment timer.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.
(Continued on next page)

Tennis Operations

171

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

Action

MENU- Dimming
level (0-9): nn%
nn = current level
None = bright
90% =
80% =
70% =
60% =
50% =
40% =
30% =
20% =
10% =

<0>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>

Press <0> through <9> or use the arrow keys <Í>
<Î>, to select the intensity for the digits on the
scoreboard.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data, and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key <Ð> to scroll to the next
selection.
Note: Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products.
Indoor LED and incandescent products only support
one level of dimming at 50%.

Edit Settings
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
edit SETTINGS?

Action
Press  or the right or left arrow key to select
the Settings submenu and show the first prompt on
the LCD.
Refer to Section 11.4 Settings.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

172

Tennis Operations

Time of Day
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
SELECT TOD?

Action
Press  or the right arrow key to select the
Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on
the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*12, 2-24 HOUR

Press <1> or <2> to display the time of day in 12
hour (default) or 24 hour format.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
TOD hh:mm:ss*
hh:mm:ss = current setting

Enter the time of day in hours, minutes, and
seconds using the selected format on the number
pad and press .
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*GAME 2-tod
* = current setting

MENU-TIME OF DAY
BLANK GAME DATA?

Tennis Operations

Press <1> or <2> to display the game clock
(default) or the time of day clock on the scoreboard.
Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and
return to the game.

If 2-tod is selected, this message will be displayed.
Press  to blank all game data on the
scoreboard except for the Time of Day digits.

173

11.4 Settings
The following settings can be edited by the user when EDIT SETTINGS has been selected
from the Main Menu.
Main Clock
Note 1: The settings entered for Main Clock are used with the
 key.
Note 2: The period length is used differently depending on the direction of the main clock.
For count down, the main clock is set to the selected length, decrements towards zero, and
stops at zero. For count up, the main clock is set to zero, increments towards the selected
length, and stops when the selected length is reached.
LCD Display

MAIN CLOCK-TIME
PERIOD mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Action
Enter the correct amount of time per period in minutes
and seconds on the number pad and press .
For example, 20:00 per period.

Switch Output
The All Sport 5000 series console has a switch that can be used to drive a number of different
devices. The switch can be configured to operate under different settings. The default
setting is 1-CLOCK= 0.
To display the switch settings that you want to select:
Press the number (0,1,2,3) key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to
the desired setting.
Press  to select the new setting.
Press  or the down arrow key to leave the switch setting and display the next prompt
(please refer to the table on the following page).

174

Tennis Operations

The possible settings for switch output are as follows:
Setting

Result

0-DISABLED

The switch remains open at all times and any
external devices are disabled.

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
0-DISABLED?
n = current setting

1-CLOCK = 0

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
1-CLOCK =0?
n = current setting

2-CLOCK STOP

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
2-CLOCK STOP?
n = current setting

3-MAIN HORN

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
3-MAIN HORN?

In count down mode, the switch closes when the
main clock reaches zero and remains closed until a
nonzero value is entered.
In count up mode, the switch closes when the main
clock reaches the proper period, break, or overtime
length and opens when any other value is entered.

The switch closes when the main clock is stopped
and opens when the main clock is running. External
devices are disabled when the main clock is
running.

The switch closes when the main horn sounds. This
could be when Auto Horn is enabled and the main
clock reaches zero or when  is pressed.

n = current setting

Default Settings
Write the settings for this installation in the space (Custom) provided.
Setting

Default

Main Clock Period
Length

00:00

Switch Output

1-Clock = 0

Tennis Operations

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

175

Section 12: Track Operations
Sport Insert: LL-2439
The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section. The Team Name insert and Block
Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A. The Quick Reference is located in Appendix D.
Reference Drawings:
Block Diagrams, A/S5000/3000, Outdoor Sports ...............................................Drawing A-124690
Insert, Track ........................................................................................................Drawing A-125094
Insert, Team Name .............................................................................................Drawing A-125290
Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert. Read Section 2
carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions.
If an insert is lost or damaged, a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be
used until a replacement can be ordered.
Use the labels provided in Appendix B to attach the correct code number label to the sport insert in
the appropriate location. Write the code number in the space provided below.
Write the correct code number here.

Notes: The four-digit code displayed is the code that is currently selected. Code 8601
is the code for manual data input.
External Timer Codes 8602 - 8604
•

•
•

•
•

•

External timers must have specific Baud rates entered into the Venus® 7000
computer when using RTD information. The different rates are noted with
each external timer.
Code 8602 is for interfacing with the PowerTime timer.
The Scoreboard type setting in the PowerTime under
initialization/scoreboard/type must be set to multi-line and 1. The baud rate
must be changed to 9600 in the Venus 7000 computer.
Code 8603 is for interfacing with the OmniSport® 1000 or OmniSport 6000.
The “Current Loop Scoreboard Setting” under Setup / Comm. Ports on the
OmniSport 6000 must be set to “SW-87/89, MS-167/169” if code 8603 is used
with the OmniSport 6000 track timing program. The baud rate must be set to
12800 Baud in the Venus 7000 computer.
Code 8604 is for interfacing with Hawkeye or Finish Lynx timers.
The Baud rate for the Hawkeye and Finish Lynx timers must be set to 9600
Baud.

Track Operations

177

If you do not know the code number to enter for your scoreboard, refer to Appendix B in this
manual. If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard, refer to the Installation
and Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard.

12.1 Track Keys
Reset
LCD Display

TIME 0:05.15 ↑
ENTER TO RESET
n = current setting

Action
When  is pressed, the message “Enter to
Reset” will appear on the bottom line of the LCD.
Press  to reset the main clock.
Note: The  function is disabled while the
clock is running.
The  function is also disabled when an
external timer code is selected.

Lane
LCD Display

LANE
N

Action
Press  to set the value of the lane digits on
the scoreboard.

n = current setting

LANE: N
EXTERNAL TIMER
n = current setting

178

This message is displayed when an external timer
code is selected. Use the external timer to modify
the value.

Track Operations

Place
LCD Display

PLACE:N

Action
Press  to set the place of the runner in
the lane specified on the scoreboard.

n = current setting

PLACE: N
EXTERNAL TIMER
n = current setting

This message is displayed when an external
timer code is selected. Use the external timer to
modify the value.

Home and Guest 1 Score
The Home and Guest 1 Score keys are used to modify the value of home or guest team score.
When the LCD Display is as shown, the following actions may be selected.
LCD Display

TEAM SCORE-EDIT
HOME nnn
nnn = current setting

Track Operations

Action
Enter the new value of score for the particular
team and press .
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the
new value for the team score of the
corresponding team.

179

Guest 2 and Guest 3 Score (Event/Heat)
The function of the Guest 2 and Guest 3 score keys depends on the GUEST 2,3 VALUE in EDIT
SETTINGS. Refer to Section 12.4.
LCD Display

EVENT - EDIT
nnn
nnn = current setting

Action
If the value of Guest 2 and 3 in the settings menu is
set to event/heat, and the manual timing code is
selected the LCD will display the current event or
heat number.
Enter the new value and press .
The Event Value is modified by the Guest 2 key
and the Heat Value is modified by the Guest 3 key.

EVENT: nnn
EXTERNAL TIMER
nnn = current setting

This message is displayed on the LCD if an
external timer code is selected and the value of
Guest 2 and 3 in the settings menu is set to
event/heat.
Note: The event or heat value will be automatically
updated to correspond with the external timer value
if an external timer code is selected. Use the
external timer to modify these values.
To enter event heat information on the scoreboard
without updates from the external timer, change the
Guest 2,3 setting in the settings menu to “SCORE”.

TEAM SCORE-EDIT
GUEST 2 nnn

If the value of Guest 2 and 3 in the settings menu,
is set to score, the LCD will display the current
value of score for the corresponding team.
Enter the new value and press .

180

Track Operations

Score +1
The home and guest 1 and 2  keys are used to increment the team score.
LCD Display

TEAM SCORE-+1
HOME nnn
nnn = current setting

Action
Press the appropriate score key to increment or
decrement the score for the home or guest team.
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the
new value for the team score of the corresponding
team.

12.2 Edit
The  key allows the user to select and edit the following scoreboard fields.
Press  and the key for the home or guest field to be edited.
Score +1
LCD Display

TEAM SCORE-EDIT
HOME nnn*
Nnn = current setting

Action
Press  and any of the SCORE keys for the
home or guest team to display the current team
score setting.
Enter the correct team score on the number pad
and press .

12.3 Menu
The  key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport. The
up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list. Pressing a key other
than , , the arrow keys, and other allowed keys exits the Menu function.
The MENU function should be used at the beginning of each new game to edit the Home
and Guest Rosters.

Track Operations

181

New Game
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW GAME?

Action
Press  to clear all of the program data for the
last game played or the game in progress and begin
running the selected sport.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

New Code
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW CODE?

Action
Press  to begin selection of a new code from
the ENTER CODE prompt.
Press  to resume the game in progress, using
the current data, and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Home Roster, Guest Roster
Home Roster and Guest Roster are entered in the same way. Home Roster is used as an
example.
LCD Display

MENU-ROSTER
SELECT HOME

Action
Press  or the right or left arrow key to select
the Home or Guest Roster submenu and show the
first prompt on the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.
(Continued on next page)

182

Track Operations

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

HOME-TEAM NAME
aaaaaaaaaaaaa*

Action
The TEAM NAME (LL-2441) insert must be
inserted to enter the Team Name Message
Center (TNMC) settings.
The TNMC is updated after each selection is
completed.
Use the COLUMNS, ROWS and STROKE keys to
select the WIDTH, HEIGHT and FONT of the
TNMC. The defaults are 48 columns, 8 rows and
single stroke.
Enter up to fifteen (15) characters for the team
name and press .
Reinsert the TRACK (LL-2439) insert to continue.

HOME-TEAM abbr
aaaaaaaaaa*

The TEAM NAME (LL-2441) insert must be
inserted to enter the Team Name Message
Center (TNMC) settings.
The TNMC is updated after each selection is
completed.
Use the COLUMNS, ROWS and STROKE keys to
select the WIDTH, HEIGHT and FONT of the
TNMC. The defaults are 48 columns, 8 rows and
single stroke.
Enter up to fifteen (15) characters for the team
abbreviation and press .
Reinsert the TRACK (LL-2439) insert to continue.

Display Menu
The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the
brightness of the scoreboard.
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN ENTER
DISPLAY MENU?

Track Operations

Action
Press  to select the Display submenu and
show the first prompt on the LCD. Press the down
arrow key to scroll to the next selection.

183

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

Action

MENU-DISPLAY RUN
SEG TIMER Y/N

Note: The segment timer function is disabled while
the clock is running.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.

EXIT GAME
ARE YOU SURE Y/N

This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit the
sport code and enter the segment timer
The SEGMENT TIMER (LL-2475) insert must be
inserted to enter the Segment Timer settings.
Refer to Section 3 for more information on the
segment timer.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.

MENU- Dimming
level (0-9): nn%
nn = current level
None = bright
90% =
80% =
70% =
60% =
50% =
40% =
30% =
20% =
10% =

184

<0>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>

Press <0> through <9> or use the arrow keys <Í>
<Î>, to select the intensity for the digits on the
scoreboard.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data, and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key <Ð> to scroll to the next
selection.
Note: Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products.
Indoor LED and incandescent products only support
one level of dimming at 50%.

Track Operations

Edit Settings
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
EDIT SETTINGS?

Action
Press  or the right or left arrow key to select
the Settings submenu and show the first prompt on
the LCD.
Refer to Section 12.4.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Time of Day
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
SELECT TOD?

Action
Press  or the right arrow key to select the
Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on
the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*12, 2-24 HOUR

Press <1> or <2> to display the time of day in 12
hour (default) or 24 hour format.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
TOD hh:mm:ss*
hh:mm:ss = current setting

Enter the time of day in hours, minutes, and
seconds using the selected format on the number
pad and press .
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.
(Continued on next page)

Track Operations

185

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*GAME 2-TOD
* = current setting

Action
Press <1> or <2> to display the game clock
(default) or the time of day clock on the
scoreboard.
Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and
return to the game.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
BLANK GAME DATA?

If 2-tod is selected, this message will be displayed.
Press  to blank all game data on the
scoreboard except for the Time of Day digits.

12.4 Settings
The following settings can be edited by the user when EDIT SETTINGS has been selected
from the Main Menu.
Guest 2 and Guest 3 key function
LCD Display

GUEST 2,3 VALUE
SCORE←→EVNT/HT

Action
This setting determines the function of the Guest 2
and Guest 3 keys.
When the value is set to EVNT/HT, the scoreboard
will display event/heat information. If an external
timer code is selected, the Guest 2 and Guest 3
keys will be disabled and event/heat information
will be taken from the external timer.
When the value is set to SCORE, the scoreboard
will display scores for guests 2 and 3 on the
scoreboard. The scores will be obtained from the
Guest 2 and Guest 3 keys on the keypad.
The current value is shown by the location of the
asterisk. Press the left or right arrow key to
change the value to score or event/heat
respectively.
(Continued on next page)

186

Track Operations

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

Action
Notes: If Event/Heat is selected, the Event/Heat
value will be updated automatically when an
external timer code is used.
Use the SCORE setting if you do not want the
values to be updated externally in an external timer
code.

Switch Output
The All Sport 5000 series console has a switch that can be used to drive a number of different
devices. The switch can be configured to operate under different settings. The default
setting is 1-CLOCK= 0.
To display the switch setting that you want to select:
•

Press the number (0,1,2,3) key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to
scroll to the desired setting.

•

Press  to select the new setting.

•

Press  or the down arrow key to leave the switch setting and display the next
prompt.

The possible settings for the switch output are as follows:
Setting

Result

0-DISABLED

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
0-DISABLED?

The switch remains open at all times and any external
devices are disabled.

n = current setting

1-CLOCK = 0

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
1-CLOCK =0?

In count down mode, the switch closes when the
main clock reaches zero and remains closed until a
nonzero value is entered.

n = current setting
In count up mode, the switch closes when the main
clock reaches the proper period, break, or overtime
length and opens when any other value is entered.
(Continued on next page)

Track Operations

187

(Continued from previous page)

Setting

Result

2-CLOCK STOP

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
2-CLOCK STOP?

The switch closes when the main clock is stopped
and opens when the main clock is running. External
devices are disabled when the main clock is running.

n = current setting

3-MAIN HORN

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
3-MAIN HORN?

The switch closes when the main horn sounds. This
could be when Auto Horn is enabled and the main
clock reaches zero or when  is pressed.

n = current setting

Default Settings
Write the settings for this installation in the space (Custom) provided.
Setting

188

Default

Guest 2,3 Score or
Event/Heat

Event/Heat

Switch Output

1-Clock = 0

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

Track Operations

Section 13: Volleyball Operations
Sport Insert: LL-2434
The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section. The Team Name insert and Block
Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A. The Quick Reference is located in Appendix D.
Reference Drawings:
Block Diagrams, A/S5000/3000, BB, VB & WR #1.............................................Drawing A-124686
Block Diagrams, A/S5000/3000, BB, VB & WR #3.............................................Drawing A-124688
Insert, Volleyball..................................................................................................Drawing A-125055
Insert, Team Name .............................................................................................Drawing A-125290
Block Diagrams, A/S5000/3000, BB, VB & WR #2.............................................Drawing A-125415
Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert. Read Section 2
carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions.
If an insert is lost or damaged, a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be
used until a replacement can be ordered.
Use the labels provided in Appendix B to attach the correct code number label to the sport insert in
the appropriate location. Write the code number in the space provided below.
Write the correct code number here.

If you do not know the code number to enter for your scoreboard, refer to Appendix B in this
manual. If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard, refer to the Installation and
Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard.

Volleyball Operations

189

13.1 Volleyball Keys
Time Out On/Off
 stops and starts the time out clock. The length of both the full and
partial time outs can also be changed when the time out clock is stopped.
LCD Display

TIME OUTs-SELECT
FULL? MM:SS
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Action
Press  to display the
configured time for full time out length.
To accept the full time out length press .
To decline the selection of the full time out length
press .
To change the full time out length, enter the new
length in minutes and seconds on the number pad
and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return to
the game.

Notes: Only the time outs configured in the
EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the
LCD and available for selection.
The up and down arrow keys can also be used to
select the full and partial time outs.

Time Out
The home and guest  keys are used to decrement the number of time outs
remaining and start the time out clock. The scoreboard indicator is turned on when the type
of time out is selected (full or partial). The scoreboard indicator is turned off when the time
out clock expires or is stopped.
Note 1: Only the types (full or partial) of time outs that were configured in the EDIT
SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection.
Note 2: The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs
(please refer to the table on the following page).

190

Volleyball Operations

LCD Display

TIME OUT-HOME
FULL
n
n = current setting

Action
Press  to display the number of full time
outs remaining.
To accept the full time out and start the time out clock,
press . Full time out decrements.
To decline the selection of a full time out, press .
Full time out does not decrement.
Note: The up and down arrow keys can also be used to
select the full and partial time outs.

TIME OUT-HOME
PARTIAL n
n = current setting

Press  a second time to display the
number of partial time outs remaining.
To accept the partial time out and start the time out
clock, press . Partial time out decrements.
To decline the selection of a partial time out, press
. Partial time out does not decrement.
Note: The up and down arrow keys can also be used to
select the full and partial time outs.
This message appears when there are no time outs left.

TIME OUT-HOME
NO TIME OUTS
Match Number +1, Games +1
The and  keys are both used to increment their
respective totals.  is used as an example.
LCD Display

game no.: -+1
n
n = current setting

Volleyball Operations

Action
Press the appropriate key to increment statistics for the
home or guest team.
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new
value for the corresponding team.

191

Score +1, -1
The home and guest  and  keys are used to increment and
decrement the team score.
LCD Display

TEAM SCORE: +1
HOME
nnn
nnn = current setting

Action
Press the appropriate score key to increment or
decrement the score for the home or guest team.
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new
value for the team score of the corresponding team.

Games Won +1
The home and guest keys are used to increment their respective totals.
LCD Display

GAMES WON: +1
HOME nn
nn = current setting

Action
Press the  key to increment the
number of games won by the home or guest team.
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new
value for the corresponding team.

Aces, Kills, Blocks, and Digs
The home and guest , ,  and  keys are all used
to increment their respective totals.  is used as an example.
LCD Display

aces: +1
HOME
nnn
nnn = current setting

aces: +1
HOME PLAYER nn*
nn = current setting

Action
Press the appropriate key to increment statistics for
the home or guest team.
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new
value for the corresponding team.

If the program is configured to update the player
stats, this prompt displays asking for a player
number.
Enter the jersey number of the player who made the
play and press .
(Continued on next page)

192

Volleyball Operations

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

HOME PLAYER nn
NOT FOUND, ADD?
nn = current setting

Action
If the player is not in the roster, this prompt asks if
the player should be added.
Press  to add the player to the roster and
credit the play to that player.
Press  to decline the entry of the player
number.

HOME PLAYER nn
ROSTER FULL

This message displays when the answer to the
previous prompt is YES and the roster is full.

nn = current setting

HOME PLAYER nn
aces nn
nn = current setting

The players number and number of points display if
the player was found in the game or correctly added
to the roster.

Serve
LCD Display

Action

HOME serve
ON

Press the home or guest  key, to turn on
the possession indicator for that team.

HOME serve
OFF

To turn off the possession indicator, press the same
 key a second time or press the opposite
 key.

In Game/Out of Game
The  and  keys are only functional when the Home or Guest
 key has been pressed.
Delete Player
The  key is only functional when the Home or Guest  key
has been pressed.

Volleyball Operations

193

Player
Note: If player stats are being received from DSTI the keys PLAYER, IND SUB, and MASS
SUB will be disabled. The LCD will display the messages shown below when these keys are
pressed.
LCD Display

STATS received
Key disabled
Exit stats mode
Y/n?

LCD Display

HOME PLAYER nn*
nn = current setting

Action
The key disabled message will display for one
second and then the  message will
display and wait for a  or  key. If the
 key is pressed then stats data will be saved
in the console and the console will 
mode until another stats packet is received. This
will allow the operator to enter player stats from the
console if the DSTI feed is lost.

Action
When the home or guest  key is
pressed, this prompt asks the jersey number of the
player to be edited.
Enter the jersey number on the number pad and
press .

HOME PLAYER nn
NOT FOUND, aDD?
nn, dd = current settings

If the player is not in the roster, this prompt asks if
the player should be added.
Press  to add the player to the roster.
Press  to decline the entry of the player
number.

HOME PLAYER nn
ROSTER FULL

This message displays when the answer to the
previous prompt is YES and the roster is full.

nn = current setting
(Continued on next page)

194

Volleyball Operations

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

HOME PLAYER nn
S-n a-nn* k-nn
nn = player number
S-I = in game
S-o = out of game
a-nn = number of aces
k-nn = number of kills
b-nn = number of blocks
d-nn = number of digs

Action
If the player is found, the player’s game status and
statistics can be changed.
To change a player’s statistics:

1. Use the up and down arrow keys to select
the player from the list.

2. Use the left and right arrow keys to select
the statistic to be changed. The display
shifts to show all of the statistic fields.

3. Enter the correct number for the selected
statistic on the number pad and press
.
To change a player’s game status:

1. Use the up and down arrow keys to select
the player from the list.

2. Press  or .
3. The S field on the display changes to show
the player’s current status.
Press  to exit the menu and return to the
game.

HOME PLAYER nn
DELETE PLAYER?

To delete an incorrect player from the roster use the
up and down arrow keys to select the player from
the list and press .
Press  to remove the player from the roster.
Press  or  to decline the deletion
process and return to the game.

Volleyball Operations

195

Individual Substitution
LCD Display

IND SUB-HOME
nn* in for nn*
nn = current setting

Action
When the home or guest  key is
pressed, this prompt asks the jersey number of the
player entering and leaving the game.
Enter the jersey number of the player entering the game
on the number pad and press .
Enter the jersey number of the player leaving the game
on the number pad and press .

IND SUB-HOME
SUB OK

This message is displayed if no errors are found.

IND SUB-HOME
SUB NOT MADE

This message is displayed for the following reasons:
The player going into the game is already marked as in
the game.
The player coming out of the game is not marked as in
the game.

IND SUB-HOME
NOT FOUND nn
nn = current setting

This message is displayed if the player going in or the
player coming out of the game is not found in the roster.
Press  to correct the jersey number.
Enter the correct jersey number and press .

196

Volleyball Operations

Mass Substitution
LCD Display

MASS SUB-HOME
PLAYER 1 nn*
nn = current setting

Action
After the home or guest  key is pressed,
the LCD will display a message on the LCD asking for
the first of six player numbers that are going into the
game. Enter the jersey number on the number pad
and press  for each of the six players. Press
 at any time to exit the Mass Substitution
function.
When the home or guest  key is
pressed, this prompt asks the jersey number of the first
player entering the game.
Enter the jersey number of the each of the six players
entering the game on the number pad and press
.

mass SUB-HOME
SUB OK

This message is displayed if no errors are found.

MASS SUB-HOME
DUPLICATE nn

This message displays for each duplicate jersey
number found for the six players going into the game.

nn = current setting

Press  to correct the jersey number.
Enter the correct jersey number and press .

MASS SUB-HOME
NOT FOUND nn
nn = current setting

This message displays for each player not found in the
roster.
Press  to correct the jersey number.
Enter the correct jersey number and press .

Volleyball Operations

197

13.2 Edit
The  key allows the user to select and edit the following scoreboard fields.
Press  and the key for the field to be edited.
Match Number +1, Games +1
The and  keys are edited in the same ways.  is used as an example.
LCD Display

game no: edit
n*
n = current setting

Action
Press  and the appropriate statistic key to
display the current setting.
Enter the correct number on the number pad and press
.

Time Out
Note 1: Only the time outs configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the
LCD and available for selection.
Note 2: The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs.
LCD Display

TIME OUT-HOME
FULL
n*
n = current setting

Action
Press   for the home or guest
team to display the current setting of full time outs
remaining.
Enter the correct number of full time outs on the
number pad and press .

TIME OUT-HOME
PARTIAL n*
n = current setting

Press   for the home or guest
team a second time or the down arrow key to display
the current setting of full time outs remaining.
Enter the correct number of partial time outs on the
number pad and press .

198

Volleyball Operations

Score +1, -1
LCD Display

TEAM SCORE: EDIT
HOME
nnn*
nnn = current setting

Action
Press  and either of the SCORE keys for
the home or guest team to display the current team
score setting.
Enter the correct team score on the number pad
and press .

Games Won +1
LCD Display

GAMES WON: edit
HOME nn*
n = current setting

Action
Press   for the home or
guest team to display the current setting of games
won.
Enter the correct number of games won on the
number pad and press .

Aces, Kills, Blocks, and Digs
The home and guest , , , and  keys are all
edited in the same way.  is used as an example.
LCD Display

aces: edit
HOME
nnn*
nnn = current setting

aces: edit
HOME PLAYER nn*
nn = current setting

Action
Press  and the appropriate statistic key to
display the current setting.
Enter the correct number on the number pad and
press .

If the program is configured to update the player
stats, this prompt displays asking for a player
number.
Enter the jersey number of the player who scored
the points and press .

Volleyball Operations

199

Time Out On/Off
LCD Display

TIME OUTs-edit
FULL MM:SS
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

TIME OUT- edit
PARTIAL MM:SS
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Action
Press   to display the
current time setting for full time outs.
Enter the correct time on the number pad and press
.

Press  a second time or the
down arrow key to display the configured time for
partial time out length.
Enter the correct time on the number pad and press
.

13.3 Menu
The  key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport. The
up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list. Pressing a key other
than , , the arrow keys, and other allowed keys exits the Menu function.
The MENU function should be used at the beginning of each new game to edit the Home and
Guest Rosters.
New Game
When the LCD Display is as shown, the following actions may be selected.
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW GAME?

Action
Press  to clear all of the program data for the
last game played or the game in progress and begin
running the selected sport.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

200

Volleyball Operations

New Code
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW CODE?

Action
Press  to begin selection of a new code from
the ENTER CODE prompt.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Home Roster, Guest Roster
Home Roster and Guest Roster are entered in the same way. Home Roster is used as an
example.
LCD Display

MENU-ROSTER
SELECT HOME

Action
Press  or the right or left arrow key to select
the Home or Guest Roster submenu and show the
first prompt on the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

HOME-TEAM NAME
aaaaaaaaaaaaa*

The TEAM NAME (LL-2441) insert must be
inserted to enter the Team Name Message
Center (TNMC) settings.
The TNMC is updated after each selection is
completed.
Use the COLUMNS, ROWS and STROKE keys to
select the WIDTH, HEIGHT and FONT of the
TNMC. The defaults are 48 columns, 8 rows and
single stroke.
Enter up to fifteen (15) characters for the team
name and press 
Reinsert the VOLLEYBALL (LL-2434) insert to
continue.

Volleyball Operations

201

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

HOME-TEAM abbr
aaaaaaaaaa*

Action
The TEAM NAME (LL-2441) insert must be
inserted to enter the Team Name Message
Center (TNMC) settings.
The TNMC is updated after each selection is
completed.
Use the COLUMNS, ROWS and STROKE keys to
select the WIDTH, HEIGHT and FONT of the
TNMC. The defaults are 48 columns, 8 rows and
single stroke.
Enter up to ten (10) characters for the team
abbreviation and press .
Reinsert the VOLLEYBALL (LL-2434) insert to
continue.

MENU-HOME
PLAYER 01 nn*
nn = current setting

Enter the jersey number for that player from the
official roster and press . The next
player is shown on the LCD. Continue entering the
jersey numbers for up to 15 players.
Press the  key to advance to the next
option.

MENU-HOME
CLEAR STATS?

This function clears all game statistics and should
only be used before the start of a game.
Press  to clear the in-game status, fouls,
and points for all players in the home roster.
Press  to decline the selection.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

202

Volleyball Operations

Display Menu
The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the
brightness of the scoreboard.
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN ENTER
DISPLAY MENU?

Action
Press  to select the Display submenu and
show the first prompt on the LCD.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

MENU-DISPLAY RUN
SEG TIMER Y/N

Note: The segment timer function is disabled while
the clock is running.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.

EXIT GAME
ARE YOU SURE Y/N

This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit the
sport code and enter the segment timer
The SEGMENT TIMER (LL-2475) insert must be
installed to enter the Segment Timer settings.
Refer to Section 3 for extra information on the
segment timer.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.
(Continued on nest page)

Volleyball Operations

203

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

Action

MENU- Dimming
level (0-9): nn%
nn = current level
None = bright
90% =
80% =
70% =
60% =
50% =
40% =
30% =
20% =
10% =

<0>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>

Press <0> through <9> or use the arrow keys <Í>
<Î>, to select the intensity for the digits on the
scoreboard.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data, and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key <Ð> to scroll to the next
selection.
Note: Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products.
Indoor LED and incandescent products only support
one level of dimming at 50%.

Edit Settings
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
edit SETTINGS?

Action
Press  or the right or left arrow key to select
the Settings submenu and show the first prompt on
the LCD.
Refer to Section 13.4.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

204

Volleyball Operations

Time of Day
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
SELECT TOD?

Action
Press  or the right arrow key to select the Time
of Day submenu and show the first prompt on the
LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*12, 2-24 HOUR

Press <1> or <2> to display the time of day in 12 hour
(default) or 24 hour format.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
TOD hh:mm:ss*
hh:mm:ss = current setting

Enter the time of day in hours, minutes, and seconds
using the selected format on the number pad and
press .
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*GAME 2-tod
* = current setting

MENU-TIME OF DAY
BLANK GAME DATA?

Volleyball Operations

Press <1> or <2> to display the game clock (default)
or the time of day clock on the scoreboard.
Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and return
to the game.

If 2-tod is selected, this message will be displayed.
Press  to blank all game data on the
scoreboard except for the Time of Day digits.

205

13.4 Settings
The following settings can be edited by the user when EDIT SETTINGS has been selected
from the Main Menu.
Main Clock
Note 1: The settings entered for Main Clock are used with the
 key.
Note 2: The period, break, and overtime lengths are used differently depending on the
direction of the main clock. For count down, the main clock is set to the selected length,
decrements towards zero, and stops at zero. For count up, the main clock is set to zero,
increments towards the selected length, and stops when the selected length is reached.
LCD Display

MAIN CLOCK-MODE
TENTH SECOND? n
n = current setting

Action
When the main clock is set to count down and tenths
of a second is selected, the main clock displays in
tenths of a second remaining when the time is below
one minute.
Press  to set the main clock to display tenths of
a second.
Press  to display whole seconds.

MAIN CLOCK-TIME
PERIOD mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

MAIN CLOCK-TIME
break mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Enter the correct amount of time per period in minutes
and seconds on the number pad and press .
For example, 60:00 per game.

Set the amount of time for the breaks between games.
Enter the correct amount of time for breaks in minutes
and seconds on the number pad and press .
For example, 3:00.

206

Volleyball Operations

Time Outs
Note 1: If a full or partial time out is not needed for the HOME or GUEST 
keys, enter zero for the number of time outs.
Note 2 If a full or partial time out is not needed for , enter zero for
the time.
LCD Display

TIME OUTS-MODE
FULL
n*

Action
Enter the number of full time outs on the number pad
and press .

n = current setting

TIME OUTS-TIME
FULL mm:ss*
mm:ss = current setting

Enter the amount of time for a full time out in minutes
and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 0:30.

TIME OUTS-MODE
WARNING mm:ss*
mm:ss = current setting

A warning horn can be configured to signal the end
of a full/partial time out. While the time out clock is
counting down, the horn will sound for one second
when the warning time is reached. Enter a zero for
the time to disable the warning horn.
Enter the time in minutes and seconds on the
number pad and press .

TIME OUTS-MODE
PARTIAL n*

Enter the number of partial time outs on the number
pad and press .

n = current setting

TIME OUTS-TIME
PARTIAL mm:ss*
mm:ss = current setting

Enter the amount of time for a partial time out in
minutes and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 00:20

TIME OUTS-MODE
SHOW ON MAIN? n
n = current setting

Press  to display the time out time on the LCD
and the main clock digits of the scoreboard while the
time out clock is active.
Press  to display the time out time on the LCD
only.

Volleyball Operations

207

Team Stats
UPDATE PLAYER?
UPDATE PLAYER? allows the entry of a player number after the home or guest team aces,
kills, blocks or digs are incremented or decremented. This feature must be enabled for all
player-foul-points panels.
LCD Display

TEAM stats-MODE
UPDATE PLAYER? n
n = current setting

Action
This feature must be enabled for all player-foulpoints panels.
Press  to allow entry of a player number
after the home or guest team aces, kills, blocks or
digs are incremented or decremented.
Press  to prevent entry of a player number.

User Def 1 and User Def 2
User Def 1 and User Def 2 are used to define which statistics (aces, kills, blocks or digs) are
displayed on the scoreboard. Only two of the four statistics can be selected to display on the
player-foul-points panels for the individual players in the game.
•
•

User Def 1 displays the statistics in the Team Score digits.
User Def 2 displays the statistics in the Player/Foul digits.

User Def 1 and User Def 2 are entered in the same way. User Def 1 is used as an example.
Press the number (1,2,3,4) key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to
the desired setting.

LCD Display

user def 1 = n
1 - aces
n = current setting
user def 1 = Team Score
user def 1 = Player/Foul

Action
Press <1> or use the left and right arrow keys to
scroll to ACES.
Press  to display ACES on the
scoreboard.
Press  to decline the selection and return to
the game.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.
(Continued on next page)

208

Volleyball Operations

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

user def 1 = n
2 - kills
n = current setting
user def 1 = Team Score
user def 1 = Player/Foul

Action
Press <2> or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll
to KILLS.
Press  to display KILLS on the scoreboard.
Press  to decline the selection and return to the
game.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

user def 1 = n
3 - blocks
n = current setting
user def 1 = Team Score
user def 1 = Player/Foul

Press <3> or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll
to BLOCKS.
Press  to display BLOCKS on the scoreboard.
Press  to decline the selection and return to the
game.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

user def 1 = n
4 - digs
n = current setting
user def 1 = Team Score
user def 1 = Player/Foul

Press <4> or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll
to DIGS.
Press  to display DIGS on the scoreboard.
Press  to decline the selection and return to the
game.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Volleyball Operations

209

Select Captions
LCD Display

Select captions
on 1 ← → 2 off

Action
This menu option allows for the controlled backlit
captions to be turned ON/OFF.
Press the <1> key to select ON and OFF for captions
controlled by control #1.
Press the <2> key to select ON and OFF for captions
controlled by control #2.

210

Volleyball Operations

Switch Output
The All Sport 5000 series console has a switch that can be used to drive a number of different
devices. The switch can be configured to operate under different settings. The default
setting is 1-CLOCK= 0.
To display the switch setting that you want to select:
Press the number (0,1,2,3) key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to
the desired setting.
Press  to select the new setting.
Press  or the down arrow key to leave the switch setting and display the next prompt.
The possible settings for the switch output are as follows:
Setting

Result

0-DISABLED

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
0-DISABLED?

The switch remains open at all times and any external
devices are disabled.

n = current setting

1-CLOCK = 0

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
1-CLOCK =0?

In count down mode, the switch closes when the main
clock reaches zero and remains closed until a nonzero
value is entered.

n = current setting
In count up mode, the switch closes when the main
clock reaches the proper period, break, or overtime
length and opens when any other value is entered.

2-CLOCK STOP

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
2-CLOCK STOP?

The switch closes when the main clock is stopped and
opens when the main clock is running. External devices
are disabled when the main clock is running.

n = current setting

3-MAIN HORN

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
3-MAIN HORN?

The switch closes when the main horn sounds. This
could be when Auto Horn is enabled and the main
clock reaches zero or when  is pressed.

n = current setting

Volleyball Operations

211

Default Settings
Write the settings for this installation in the space (Custom) provided.

212

Setting

Default

Period Length

60:00

Break Length

3:00

Update Player

No

User Def 1

Aces

User Def 2

Kills

Full Time Outs

2

Full Time Out

0:30

Partial Time Outs

0

Partial Time Out

0:00

Main Clock Mode
Tenths

N

Switch Output

1-Clock = 0

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

Volleyball Operations

Section 14: Wrestling Operations
Sport Insert: LL-2435
The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section. The Team Name insert and Block
Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A. The Quick Reference is located in Appendix D.
Reference Drawings:
Block Diagrams, A/S5000/3000, BB, VB & WR #1.............................................Drawing A-124686
Block Diagrams, A/S5000/3000, BB, VB & WR #3.............................................Drawing A-124688
Insert, Wrestling ..................................................................................................Drawing A-124701
Insert, Team Name .............................................................................................Drawing A-125290
Block Diagrams, A/S5000/3000, BB, VB & WR #2.............................................Drawing A-125415
Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert. Read Section 2
carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions.
If an insert is lost or damaged, a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be
used until a replacement can be ordered.
Use the labels provided in Appendix B to attach the correct code number label to the sport insert in
the appropriate location. Write the code number in the space provided below.
Write the correct code number here.

If you do not know the code number to enter for your scoreboard, refer to Appendix B in this
manual. If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard, refer to the Installation and
Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard.

Wrestling Operations

213

14.1 Wrestling Keys
Match Number +1
LCD Display

match- +1
n
n = current setting

Weight class
01 nnn
nnn =weight class

Action
Press  to increment the match number.
A prompt showing match number displays briefly.

If weight classes are selected, a prompt to select a
weight class will be shown on the LCD. Use the arrow
keys to select a weight class, and press . The
weight class displays in the Match digits.

Period +1
LCD Display

period +1
n
n = current setting

Action

Press  to increment the quarter number.
A prompt showing period number displays briefly.
The period time will be set to the configured period time
if the current time is at zero. There are 5 configured
period times and the time will be set based on the
current period number. If the current time was set
before the
 key is pressed, the time will not be
adjusted.

214

Wrestling Operations

Set Main Clock (Period Times)
LCD Display

MAIN CLOCK -SET
CURR mm:ss.t*
mm:ss.t = minutes, seconds,
tenths of a second

Action
After the main clock has been stopped, press  to display the current time of the
main clock.
To change the time, enter the desired time on the
number pad and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return
to the game.

MAIN CLOCK -EDIT
PERIOD mm:ss*
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

MAIN CLOCK -EDIT
PER 2
mm:ss*
MAIN CLOCK -EDIT
PER 3
mm:ss*
MAIN CLOCK -EDIT
PER 4
mm:ss*
MAIN CLOCK -EDIT
PER 5
mm:ss*

Wrestling Operations

Press  a second, third, fourth,
fifth or sixth time or the down arrow key to display
the configured time for each clock period length.
To accept the displayed period length press
.
To decline the selection of the period length press
.
To change the period length and set the main clock
enter the new time in minutes and seconds on the
number pad and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return
to the game.

215

Home Advantage, Guest Advantage, Stop Advantage Clock
LCD Display

time n:nn ↓
AD TM n:nn.n >g
n:nn = main clock
n:nn.n = advantage timer
g or h = guest or home

Action
The main clock must be running to use the
advantage timer.
Press the  or
 key to start the
advantage timer for the competitor that has control of
the match. The competitor that has the net (most)
advantage time is shown on the LCD display (G). The timer (AD TM on the display) counts up or
down depending on which competitor is in control
(last advantage key pressed) and which competitor
has the net (most) advantage time.
For example:
If the home competitor is the first to control the
match, press . The
display shows . The display
continues to show  is pressed again or the
timer reaches zero.
If zero is reached the display shows >G (which now
has the net advantage) and the timer counts up.
Press the  key to
stop the advantage timer when neither competitor is
in control.

216

Wrestling Operations

Team Score +1, -1
LCD Display

team score- +1
home = n
n = current setting

Action
Press  or  to increment
or decrement the home or guest team score.
A prompt showing total score will display briefly.
Pressing a  key will cause the team
scores to show up on the LCD (TM will show on the
LCD to indicate this). Pressing a 
key will cause the match scores to show on the LCD
(MAT will show up on the LCD to indicate this).

Match Score +1, +2, +3, -1
The home and guest , , and  keys are used to increment the team score and the  key is
used to decrement the team score.
LCD Display

match SCORE-+1
HOME
nnn
nnn = current setting

Action
Press the appropriate score key to increment or
decrement the score for the home or guest team.
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new
value for the team score of the corresponding team.

Pressing a  key will cause the
match scores to show on the LCD (MAT will show up
on the LCD to indicate this). Pressing a  key will cause the team scores to show up
on the LCD (TM will show on the LCD to indicate
this).

Wrestling Operations

217

Start/Stop Injury Time
LCD Display

g injury n:nn
AD TM n:nn.n >g
n:nn = injury timer
n:nn.n = advantage timer
g or h = guest or home

Action
The maximum allowed injury time is set for each
competitor at the beginning of a match and reset to
this time when the Reset Match function is
performed.
When enabled, the injury times are displayed in the
main clock digits and the corresponding (home or
guest) match score digits flash.
The main clock must be stopped to use the injury
timer.
Press  to start the injury
timer for the home or guest competitor. The injury
timer counts down from the maximum allowed time
until  is pressed or 0:00 is
reached. The injury time is shown on the LCD
display with H for home or G for guest.
Press the  key to stop the
injury timer and return the period time to the main
clock digits. A key press is required before the main
clock digits return to period time. This gives the
coach time to see how much injury time remains.

Reset Match
LCD Display

reset match?

Action
Press  to clear all of the data for the last
match or the match in progress and begin a new
individual match.
Press  to resume the match in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.

Select Win
Home

218

If weight classes are selected, it will ask for the
winner. Use the arrow keys to select HOME or
GUEST, and press . Enter the points for
the win, and press . The console will
advance to the next weight class and display Match
digits.

Wrestling Operations

LCD Display

TOD
et

11:36:23

Action
The console will display the time of day, elapsed time
of match, and points scored in the match. This will
display until a key is pressed.

Start/Stop Blood Time
LCD Display

g blood n:nn
AD TM n:nn.n >g
n:nn = blood timer
n:nn.n = advantage timer
g or h = guest or home

Action
The maximum allowed blood time is set for each
competitor at the beginning of a match and reset to
this time when the Reset Match function is
performed.
When enabled, the blood times are displayed in the
main clock digits and the corresponding (home or
guest) match score digits flash.
The main clock must be stopped to use the blood
timer.
Press  to start the blood
timer for the home or guest competitor. The
injury/blood timer counts down from the maximum
allowed time until  is pressed
or 0:00 is reached. The blood time is shown on the
LCD display with H for home or G for guest.
Press the  key to stop the
blood timer and return the period time to the main
clock digits.
A key press is required before the main clock digits
return to period time. This gives the coach time to
see how much blood time remains.

Wrestling Operations

219

Start/Stop Recovery Time
LCD Display

RECOVERY n:nn
AD TM n:nn.n >g
n:nn = recovery timer
n:nn.n = advantage timer

Action
The recovery time is set to the configured recovery
time for each competitor when the  key is pressed.
When enabled, the recovery times are displayed in
the main clock digits and the corresponding (home or
guest) match score digits flash.
The main clock must be stopped to use the recovery
timer.
Press  to start the
recovery timer for the home or guest competitor. The
recovery timer counts down from the maximum
allowed time until  is
pressed or 0:00 is reached.
Press the  key to stop
the recovery timer and return the period time to the
main clock digits.

14.2 Edit
The  key allows the user to select and edit the following scoreboard fields.
Press  and the key for the home or guest field to be edited.
Home Advantage, Guest Advantage
LCD Display

AD TM
home mm:ss.t*
mm:ss.t = minutes, seconds,
tenths of a second

Action
Press   to display
the current advantage time for the home competitor.
Enter the advantage time for the home competitor
on the number pad and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return
to the game.

Guest Advantage
When the LCD Display is as shown, the following actions may be selected.
220

Wrestling Operations

LCD Display

AD TM
guest mm:ss.t*
mm:ss.t = minutes, seconds,
tenths of a second

Action
Press   to display
the current advantage time for the guest competitor.
Enter the advantage time for the guest competitor
on the number pad and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return
to the game.

Blood Time
LCD Display

blood time-EDIT
HOME
mm:ss*
mm:ss = current setting

Action
Press  and either of the BLOOD TIME keys
for the home or guest team to display the current
blood time setting.
Enter the maximum allowed blood time in minutes
and seconds on the number pad and press the <
ENTER > key.
For example, 5:00.

Injury Time
LCD Display

injury time-EDIT
HOME
mm:ss*
mm:ss = current setting

Action
Press  and either of the INJURY TIME keys
for the home or guest team to display the current
injury time setting.
Enter the maximum allowed injury time in minutes
and seconds on the number pad and press the
 key.
For example, 5:00.

Match Number, Period, Team Score and Match Score
The home and guest , ,  and
 keys are all edited in the same way. Team Score is used as
an example.

Wrestling Operations

221

LCD Display

TEAM score-edit
HOME
nnn
nnn = current setting

Action
Press  and the appropriate statistic key to
display the current setting. For example, .
Enter the correct number on the number pad and
press .

222

Wrestling Operations

14.3 Menu
The  key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport. The
up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list. Pressing a key other
than , , the arrow keys, and other allowed keys, exits the Menu function.
The MENU function should be used at the beginning of each new game to edit the Home
and Guest Rosters.
New Game
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW GAME?

Action
Press  to clear all of the program data for
the last game played or the game in progress and
begin running the selected sport.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

New Code
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW CODE?

Action
Press  to begin selection of a new code from the
ENTER CODE prompt.
Press  to resume the game in progress using the
current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection

Wrestling Operations

223

Home Roster, Guest Roster
Home Roster and Guest Roster are entered in the same way. Home Roster is used as an
example.
LCD Display

MENU-ROSTER
SELECT HOME

Action
Press  or the right or left arrow key to select the
Home or Guest Roster submenu and show the first
prompt on the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using the
current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

HOME-TEAM NAME
aaaaaaaaaaaa*

The TEAM NAME (LL-2441) insert must be inserted
to enter the Team Name Message Center (TNMC)
settings.
The TNMC is updated after each selection is
completed.
Use the COLUMNS, ROWS and STROKE keys to
select the WIDTH, HEIGHT and FONT of the TNMC.
The defaults are 48 columns, 8 rows and single stroke.
Enter up to fifteen (15) characters for the team name
and press .
Reinsert the WRESTLING (LL-2435) insert to continue.

HOME-TEAM abbr
aaaaaaaaaa*

The TEAM NAME (LL-2441) insert must be inserted
to enter the Team Name Message Center (TNMC)
settings.
The TNMC is updated after each selection is
completed.
Use the COLUMNS, ROWS and STROKE keys to
select the WIDTH, HEIGHT and FONT of the TNMC.
The defaults are 48 columns, 8 rows and single stroke.
Enter up to ten (10) characters for the team
abbreviation and press .
Reinsert the WRESTLING (LL-2435) insert to
continue.

224

Wrestling Operations

Display Menu
The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the
brightness of the scoreboard.
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN ENTER
DISPLAY MENU?

Action
Press  to select the Display submenu and
show the first prompt on the LCD.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

MENU-DISPLAY RUN
SEG TIMER Y/N

Note: The segment timer function is disabled while
the clock is running.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.

EXIT GAME
ARE YOU SURE Y/N

This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit the
sport code and enter the segment timer.
The SEGMENT TIMER (LL-2475) insert must be
inserted to enter the Segment Timer settings.
Refer to Section 3 for more information on the
segment timer.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.
(Continued on next page)

Wrestling Operations

225

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

Action

MENU- Dimming
level (0-9): nn%
nn = current level
None = bright
90% =
80% =
70% =
60% =
50% =
40% =
30% =
20% =
10% =

<0>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>

Press <0> through <9>, or use the arrow keys <Í>
<Î>, to select the intensity for the digits on the
scoreboard.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data, and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key <Ð> to scroll to the next
selection.
Note: Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products.
Indoor LED and incandescent products only support
one level of dimming at 50%.

Weight Class
The WEIGHT CLASS MENU allows the user to enter the weight class values.
LCD Display

Weight Class
01* nnn win
nnn = weight class

226

Action
You may enter a total of 14 weight classes. Use the
up and down (/) arrow keys to select the index of
the weight class to edit, and press .

Weight Class
01 nnn * win

Enter a new value for the weight class and press
.

Weight Class
01 nnn win *

You can set the winner of this weight class here.
This would be used mainly for editing a winner that
was set to the wrong side. Use the arrow keys to
select H or G as the winner and press .

Weight Class
01 nnn win H2*

Enter the score for the winner and press .
Press  or  to exit from the weight
class settings.

Wrestling Operations

Edit Settings
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
edit SETTINGS?

Action
Press  or the right or left arrow key to select
the Settings submenu and show the first prompt on
the LCD.
Refer to Section 14.4.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Time of Day
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
SELECT TOD?

Action
Press  or the right arrow key to select the
Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on
the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*12, 2-24 HOUR

Press <1> or <2> to display the time of day in 12
hour (default) or 24 hour format.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
TOD hh:mm:ss*
hh:mm:ss = current setting

Enter the time of day in hours, minutes, and
seconds using the selected format on the number
pad and press .
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.
(Continued on next page)

Wrestling Operations

227

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*GAME 2-tod
* = current setting

Action
Press <1> or <2> to display the game clock
(default) or the time of day clock on the
scoreboard.
Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and
return to the game.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
BLANK GAME DATA?

If 2-tod is selected, this message will be
displayed.
Press  to blank all game data on
the scoreboard except for the Time of Day
digits.

14.4 Settings
The user can edit the following settings when EDIT SETTINGS has been selected from the
Main Menu.
Main Clock
Note 1: The settings entered for Main Clock are used with the  key.
Note 2: The period, break, and overtime lengths are used differently depending on the
direction of the main clock. For count down, the main clock is set to the selected length,
decrements towards zero, and stops at zero. For count up, the main clock is set to zero,
increments towards the selected length, and stops when the selected length is reached.
LCD Display

MAIN CLOCK-TIME
PERIOD mm:ss*
mm:ss = current setting

Action
Enter the correct amount of time per period in
minutes and seconds on the number pad and
press .
For example, 3:00 per period.
Note: Pressing  to select the period time
as the main clock setting will increment the current
period number if the clock value was previously
zero.

228

Wrestling Operations

Blood/Injury Time
The maximum allowed blood and injury times are set for each competitor at the beginning of
a match and reset to these times when the Reset Match function is performed.
When enabled, the blood and injury times are displayed in the main clock digits and the
corresponding (home or guest) match score digits flash.
LCD Display

Blood time
reset mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Action
Enter the cumulative time for blood time outs in
minutes and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 5:00.

injury time
reset mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Enter the cumulative time for injury time outs in
minutes and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 2:00.

blood/injury
SHOW ON MAIN? n
n = current setting

Press  to display the blood/injury times on the
LCD and the main clock digits of the scoreboard
while the blood/injury clock is active.
Press  to display the time out time on the LCD
only.

Weight Class
LCD Display

Weight Class
ON Y/N? – oN

Wrestling Operations

Action
This setting allows you to use weight classes. Press
 to use weight classes, or press  to
select not to use weight classes.

229

Select Captions
LCD Display

Select captions
on 1 ← → 2 off

Action
This menu option allows for the controlled backlit
captions to be turned ON/OFF.
Press the <1> key to select ON and OFF for captions
controlled by control #1.
Press the <2> key to select ON and OFF for captions
controlled by control #2.

Display Lines for Weight Class
LCD Display

# of Disp Lines
n
n = number of lines

Action
This setting represents the number of lines used on
the stat panel displays. It can only be set to 5 or 6.
Press the <5> or <6> key and then .

Display Team Score
LCD Display

Display
no
Team score y/n?
n = number of lines

Action
This menu option allows for selection of having the
Team Score display on the Matside advantage/team
score module. If set to display it will show team score
after the match is reset until an advantage time is
started.
Press  to select display ON.
Press  to select display OFF.

230

Wrestling Operations

Switch Output
The All Sport 5000 series console has a switch that can be used to drive a number of different
devices. The switch can be configured to operate under different settings. The default
setting is 1-CLOCK= 0.
To display the switch setting that you want to select:
Press the number (0,1,2,3) key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to
the desired setting.
Press  to select the new setting.
Press  or the down arrow key to leave the switch setting and display the next
prompt (please refer to the table on the following page).
The possible settings for the switch output are as follows:
Setting

Result

0-DISABLED

The switch remains open at all times and any external
devices are disabled.

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
0-DISABLED?
n = current setting

1-CLOCK = 0

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
1-CLOCK =0?
n = current setting

2-CLOCK STOP

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
2-CLOCK STOP?

In count down mode, the switch closes when the main
clock reaches zero and remains closed until a
nonzero value is entered.
In count up mode, the switch closes when the main
clock reaches the proper period, break, or overtime
length and opens when any other value is entered.

The switch closes when the main clock is stopped
and opens when the main clock is running. External
devices are disabled when the main clock is running.

n = current setting

3-MAIN HORN

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
3-MAIN HORN?

The switch closes when the main horn sounds. This
could be when Auto Horn is enabled and the main
clock reaches zero or when  is pressed.

n = current setting

Wrestling Operations

231

Section 15: Event Counter
Sport Insert: 06-58047
The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section. The Quick Reference is located in
Appendix D.
Reference Drawings:
Insert, Event Counter Codes........................................................................................Drawing A-58047
Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert. Read Section 2
carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions. If an insert is lost or damaged, a
copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be used until a replacement can be
ordered.

15.1 General Event Counter Information
Note: The All Sport 5000 uses Enhanced RTD with Venus 4600 / 7000 codes
The Event Counter program is made up of six codes used to display information about
external events. The codes used for event counter are shown below.
Day and Time Event Countdown Code
Venus 1500 RTD
371
Venus 4600/7000 Enhanced RTD 372
Time Base Counter Code
Venus 1500 RTD
373
Venus 4600/7000 Enhanced RTD 374
External Input Counter Code
Venus 1500 RTD
375
Venus 4600/7000 Enhanced RTD 376
RTD port settings are 19,200 Baud, 8 Data, and no parity for both Venus 1500 and
Enhanced RTD types.

15.2 Day and Time Event Countdown
LCD Display

DAYS nnn
HH:MM:SS

Action

↓

HH:MM.SS = current value

DAYS nnn
HH:MM:SS
Event Counter

↑

If set to count down, the number of days, hours,
minutes, and seconds remaining until the event
occurs are shown on the main LCD screen.
If set to count up, the number of days, hours,
minutes, and seconds elapsed since the event
occurred are shown on the main LCD screen.

233

Value/Days
Use the  key to set the Time in addition to the number of days to be
counted.
Press  to start the main clock. If the console is set to count down, the time value
decrements to 00:00.00 and the day value decrements by one. This continues until 0 days and
00:00.00 time occurs. The console then begins counting up and counts the days and time that
have elapsed since the event occurred.
Note: If the console is set to stop at zero, the clock will not begin counting up until the
 key is pressed.
LCD Display

DAYS
nnn

Action
Enter the number of days for countdown (0 – 999).

nnn = current value

15.3 Time Base Counter
LCD Display

VALUE = nnnnnnn
NXT INC HH:MM:SS

Action
The current value is shown on the top line of the
LCD. The time remaining until the next increment
(or decrement.) is shown on the bottom line.

nnnnnnn = current value

Value/Days
LCD Display

VALUE
nnnnnnnn

Action
Press  to begin counting from the
entered initial value. The value can be up to eight
digits.

nnnnnnn = current value

234

Event Counter

Increment Value
LCD Display

INCREMENT VALUE
nnnn

Action
This key is used to set the increment value. The
increment value will be added to the total value
each time interval.

nnnn = current value

Decrement Value
LCD Display

DECREMENT VALUE
nnnn
nnn = current value

Action
This key is used to set the decrement value. The
decrement value will be subtracted from the total
value each time interval if the increment value is
0.

Time Interval
When  is pressed to start the main clock, the controller counts down the time
interval to 00:00.00 and adjust the initial value by the increment or decrement value. The
interval time is reset and the cycle will repeat.
LCD Display

TIME INTERVAL
HH:MM:SS
HH:MM.SS = current value

Event Counter

Action
The time interval is the interval time between each
increment or decrement.
Note: The clock must be stopped to set the time
interval.

235

15.4 External Input Counter
The External Input Counter counts the occurrences of switch inputs starting at the initial
value.
Value/Days
LCD Display

VALUE
nnnnnnnn
Nnnnnnnn = current value

Action
Press  to begin counting from the
entered initial value. The value can be up to eight
significant digits.

Increment Value
LCD Display

INCREMENT VALUE
nnnn
nnnn = current value

Action
This key is used to set the increment value. The
increment value is added to the total value each
time an external switch input 1 is detected (J4).

Decrement Value
LCD Display

DECREMENT VALUE
nnnn
nnnn = current value

236

Action
This key is used to set the decrement value. The
decrement value is subtracted from the total value
each time an external switch input 2 is detected
(J4).

Event Counter

15.5 Menu
The  key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport. The
up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list. Pressing a key other
than , , the arrow keys, and other allowed keys exit the Menu function.
New Game
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW GAME?

Action
Press  to begin a new game with the default code
settings.
Press  to resume the game in progress using the
current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection.

New Code
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW CODE?

Action
Press  to begin selection of a new code from the
ENTER CODE prompt.
Press  to resume the game in progress using the
current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection.

Event Counter

237

Dim/ Bright
LCD Display

Action

MENU- Dimming
level (0-9): nn%
nn = current level
None = bright
90% =
80% =
70% =
60% =
50% =
40% =
30% =
20% =
10% =

<0>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>

Press <0> through <9> or use the arrow keys <Í>
<Î>, to select the intensity for the digits on the
scoreboard.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data, and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key <Ð> to scroll to the next
selection.

Note: Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products.
Indoor LED and incandescent products only support
one level of dimming at 50%.

Stop at Zero
The following setting is only displayed when using Day and Time codes 371 and 372.
LCD Display

STOP AT ZERO
*YES OR NO?
Default = NO

238

Action
Press  to stop the console when zero days
and zero time occurs.
Press  to set the console to start counting
time elapsed since the event occurs.

Event Counter

Section 16: Karate Operations
Sport Insert:

0G-96890 Red/White Code 282
0G-98374 White/Red Code 285

The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section. The Team Name insert and Block
Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A.
Reference Drawings:
Insert, Karate Code 282........................................................................................Drawing A-96890
Insert, Karate Code 285........................................................................................Drawing A-98374
Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert. Read Section 2
carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions.
If an insert is lost or damaged, a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be
used until a replacement can be ordered.

16.1 Karate Keys
W (Wazaari)
LCD Display

WHITE H +1
N

Action
 and  increment and decrement the
Wazaari value for the selected competitor.

N = new value

H (Hansoku)
LCD Display

WHITE H +1
N

Action
 and  increment and decrement the
Hansoku for the selected opponent.

N = new value

Karate Operations

239

M (Mubobi)
LCD Display

WHITE M +1
N

Action
 and  increment or decrement the
Mubobi value for the selected competitor

N = new value

J (Jogai)
LCD Display

WHITE J +1
N

Action
 and  increment or decrement the
Jogai value for the selected competitor

N = new value

Win
LCD Display

WHITE WIN
ON

Action
 turns on the Win indicator for the selected
opponent.

16.2 Edit
W,H,M,J
The W,H,M and J values are edited in the same way. D is shown as an example.
LCD Display

WHITE D
EDIT n
n = current setting

240

Action
When  is pressed, the current D
value is displayed for editing.
The current value is shown in the N position on the
LCD.

Karate Operations

16.3 Menu
The  key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport. The
up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list. Pressing a key other
than , , the arrow keys, and other allowed keys exit the Menu function.
New Game
When the LCD Display is as shown, the following actions may be selected.
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW GAME?

Action
Press  to clear all of the program data for the
last game played or the game in progress and begin
running the selected sport.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

New Code
When the LCD Display is as shown, the following actions may be selected.
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW CODE?

Action
Press  to begin selection of a new code from
the ENTER CODE prompt.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Karate Operations

241

Display Menu
The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the
brightness of the scoreboard.
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN ENTER
DISPLAY MENU?

Action
Press  to select the Display submenu and
show the first prompt on the LCD.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

MENU-DISPLAY RUN
SEG TIMER Y/N

Note: The segment timer function is disabled while
the clock is running.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.

EXIT GAME
ARE YOU SURE Y/N

This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit the
sport code and enter the segment timer
The SEGMENT TIMER (LL-2475) insert must be
inserted to enter the Segment Timer settings.
Refer to Section 3 for more information on the
segment timer.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.
(Continued on next page)

242

Karate Operations

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

Action

MENU- Dimming
level (0-9): nn%
nn = current level
None = bright
90% =
80% =
70% =
60% =
50% =
40% =
30% =
20% =
10% =

<0>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>

Press <0> through <9> or use the arrow keys <Í>
<Î>, to select the intensity for the digits on the
scoreboard.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data, and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key <Ð> to scroll to the next
selection.
Note: Dim levels pertain to outdoor incandescent
products. Indoor LED products only support one
level of dimming at 50%.

Edit Settings
When the LCD Display is as shown, the following actions may be selected.
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
EDIT SETTINGS?

Action
Press  or the right or left arrow key to select
the Settings submenu and show the first prompt on
the LCD.
Refer to Section 16.4.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Karate Operations

243

Time of Day
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
SELECT TOD?

Action
Press  or the right arrow key to select the
Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on
the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*12, 2-24 HOUR

Press <1> or <2> to display the time of day in 12 hour
(default) or 24 hour format.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
TOD hh:mm:ss*
hh:mm:ss = current setting

Enter the time of day in hours, minutes, and seconds
using the selected format on the number pad and
press .
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*GAME 2-TOD
* = current setting

244

Press <1> or <2> to display the game clock (default)
or the time of day clock on the scoreboard.
Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and return
to the game.

Karate Operations

16.4 Settings
The following settings can be edited by the user when EDIT SETTINGS has been selected
from the Main Menu.
Main Clock
LCD Display

MAIN CLOCK-TIME
PERIOD mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Action
Enter the correct amount of time per period in minutes
and seconds on the number pad and press .
For example, 5:00.
Note: Pressing  to select the period time as the
main clock setting will increment the current period
number if the clock value was previously zero.

Switch Output
The All Sport 5000 series console has a relay that can be used to drive a number of different
devices. The relay can be configured to operate under different settings. The default setting is
1-CLOCK= 0.
To display the relay settings that you want to select:
Press the number (0,1,2,3) key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to the
desired setting.
Press  to select the new setting.
Press  or the down arrow key to leave the relay setting and display the next prompt.
The possible settings for relay output are as follows:
Setting

Result

0-DISABLED

The relay remains open at all times and any external devices
are disabled.

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
0-DISABLED?
N = current setting
1-CLOCK = 0

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
1-CLOCK =0?
N = current setting

Karate Operations

In count down mode, the relay closes when the main clock
reaches zero and remains closed until a nonzero value is
entered.
In count up mode, the relay closes when the main clock
reaches the proper period, break, or overtime length and
opens when any other value is entered.

245

Setting

Result

2-CLOCK STOP

The relay closes when the main clock is stopped and opens
when the main clock is running. External devices are
disabled when the main clock is running.

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
2-CLOCK STOP?
N = current setting
3-MAIN HORN

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
3-MAIN HORN?

The relay closes when the main horn sounds. This could be
when Auto Horn is enabled and the main clock reaches zero
or when  is pressed.

N = current setting

Default Settings
Write the settings for this installation in the space (Custom) provided.

246

Setting

Default

Switch Output

1-Clock =0

Main Clock Period
Length

5:00

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

Karate Operations

Section 17: Tae Kwon Do Operations
Sport Insert:

0G-96889 Red/White Code 283
0G-98375 White/Red Code 286

The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section. The Team Name insert and Block
Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A
Reference Drawings:
Insert, Tae Kwon Do, Code 283............................................................................Drawing A-96889
Insert, Tae Kwon Do, Code 286............................................................................Drawing A-98375
Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert. Read Section 2
carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions.
If an insert is lost or damaged, a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be
used until a replacement can be ordered.

17.1 Tae kwon do Keys
D
LCD Display

WHITE D +1
N
N = new value

Action
 and  increment and
decrement the points value for the selected
competitor.

Gamjeom (G)
LCD Display

WHITE G +1
N
N = new value

Tae Kwon Do Operations

Action
 and  increment and
decrement the penalty count for the selected
opponent.

247

Kyong-go (K)
LCD Display

WHITE K +1
N
N = new value

Action
 and  increment or
decrement the ½ point deduction warnings for the
selected opponent.

Win
LCD Display

WHITE WIN
ON

Action
 turns on the Win indicator for the selected
opponent.

√
LCD Display

WHITE CHECK
ON

Action
<√> turns on the check indicator for the selected
opponent.

Total On/Off
 sets the total point scoring on or off. The total points for each competitor
are calculated from scoring for all rounds.
The score is calculated as follows:
D(points) – G(penalties) – ½K(warnings) = Total Score
Weight Class
LCD Display

WEIGHT CLASS
Nn

Action

 sets weight class shown on
the display.

nn = current setting

248

Tae Kwon Do Operations

Round Length
LCD Display

ROUND LENGTH
Nn:nn

Action
 sets the length of the round.

nn = current setting

Rest Length
LCD Display

REST LENGTH
Nn:nn
nn = current setting

Action
 sets the length of the rest
period. The rest length is automatically counted
down after the round time expires.

Round Number
LCD Display

ROUND NUMBER
Nn
nn = current setting

Action
 sets the current round number.
The round number will be automatically
incremented at the end of each rest period.

17.2 Menu
The  key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport. The
up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list. Pressing a key other
than , , the arrow keys, and other allowed keys exits the Menu function.

Tae Kwon Do Operations

249

New Game
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW GAME?

Action
Press  to clear all of the program data for the
last game played or the game in progress and begin
running the selected sport.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

New Code
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW CODE?

Action
Press  to begin selection of a new code from
the ENTER CODE prompt.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Reset Round
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
RESET ROUND?

Action
Press  reset the main clock to the
configured round length value.
Note: This function is disabled when the clock is
running.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

250

Tae Kwon Do Operations

Reset Rest
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
RESET REST?

Action
Press  reset the main clock to the
configured rest length value.
Note: This function is disabled when the clock is
running.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Display Menu
The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the
brightness of the scoreboard.
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN ENTER
DISPLAY MENU?

Action
Press  to select the Display submenu and
show the first prompt on the LCD.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.
(Continued on next page)

Tae Kwon Do Operations

251

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

Action

MENU-DISPLAY RUN
SEG TIMER Y/N

Note: The segment timer function is disabled
while the clock is running.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.

EXIT GAME
ARE YOU SURE Y/N

This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit
the sport code and enter the segment timer
The SEGMENT TIMER (LL-2475) insert must be
inserted to enter the Segment Timer settings.
Refer to Section 2 for more information on the
Segment Timer.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.

MENU- Dimming
level (0-9): nn%
nn = current level
None = bright
90% =
80% =
70% =
60% =
50% =
40% =
30% =
20% =
10% =

252

<0>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>

Press <0> through <9> or use the arrow keys
<Í> <Î>, to select the intensity for the digits on
the scoreboard.
Press  to resume the game in progress
using the current data, and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key <Ð> to scroll to the
next selection.
Note: Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products.
Indoor LED and incandescent products only
support one level of dimming at 50%.

Tae Kwon Do Operations

Edit Settings
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
EDIT SETTINGS?

Action
Press  or the right or left arrow key to select
the Settings submenu and show the first prompt on
the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Time of Day
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
SELECT TOD?

Action
Press  or the right arrow key to select the
Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt
on the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*12, 2-24 HOUR

Press <1> or <2> to display the time of day in 12
hour (default) or 24 hour format.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
TOD hh:mm:ss*
hh:mm:ss = current setting

Enter the time of day in hours, minutes, and
seconds using the selected format on the number
pad and press .
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*GAME 2-TOD
* = current setting

Press <1> or <2> to display the game clock
(default) or the time of day clock on the
scoreboard.
Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and
return to the game.

Tae Kwon Do Operations

253

17.3 Edit
D,G,K
The D, G, and K values are edited in the same way. D is shown as an example.
LCD Display

WHITE D
EDIT n
nn = current setting

Action
When  is pressed, the current D
value is displayed for editing.
The current value is shown in the n position on the
LCD.

17.4 Settings
The user can edit the following settings when EDIT SETTINGS has been selected from the
Main Menu.
Auto/Manual Timing
LCD Display

TIMING MODE
*AUTO←→MANUAL
* = current setting

Action
Press the left or right arrow keys to select
automatic or manual timing respectively.
In automatic timing mode, the round length value
will be loaded into the main clock and automatically
started when the rest length expires.
In manual mode, the console will wait for a
 key press to start the round time.

Switch Output
The All Sport 5000 series console has a relay that can be used to drive a number of different
devices. The relay can be configured to operate under different settings. The default setting
is 1-CLOCK= 0.
To display the relay settings that you want to select:
Press the number (0,1,2,3) key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll
to the desired setting.
Press  to select the new setting.

254

Tae Kwon Do Operations

Press  or the down arrow key to leave the relay setting and display the next
prompt.
The possible settings for relay output are as follows:
Setting

Result

0-DISABLED

The relay remains open at all times and any
external devices are disabled.

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
0-DISABLED?
N = current setting

In count down mode, the relay closes when the
main clock reaches zero and remains closed until a
nonzero value is entered.

1-CLOCK = 0

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
1-CLOCK =0?
N = current setting

In count up mode, the relay closes when the main
clock reaches the proper period, break, or overtime
length and opens when any other value is entered.

The relay closes when the main clock is stopped
and opens when the main clock is running. External
devices are disabled when the main clock is
running.

2-CLOCK STOP

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
2-CLOCK STOP?
N = current setting

The relay closes when the main horn sounds. This
could be when Auto Horn is enabled and the main
clock reaches zero or when  is pressed.

3-MAIN HORN

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
3-MAIN HORN?
N = current setting

Default Settings
Write the settings for this installation in the space (Custom) provided.
Setting

Default

Switch Output

1-Clock =0

Auto/Manual Timing

Auto

Round Length
(accessed by key)

3:00

Rest Length (accessed
by key)

1:00

Tae Kwon Do Operations

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

255

Section 18: Judo Operations
Sport Insert:

0G-96891 Blue/White Code 281
0G-98376 White/Blue Code 284

The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section. The Team Name insert and Block
Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A.
Reference Drawings:
Insert, Judo code 281 ...........................................................................................Drawing A-96891
Insert, Judo code 284 ...........................................................................................Drawing A-98376
Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert. Read Section 2
carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions.
If an insert is lost or damaged, a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be
used until a replacement can be ordered.

18.1 Judo Competitor Status
LCD Display

TIME
4:00
↓
wykp++wykp++
W = waza ari score position
Y = yuko score position
K = koka score position
P = penalty character position
+ + = medical exam positions

Action
The bottom line of the LCD will either display
the Osaekomi time, the medical time or the
competitor status during the operation of the
All Sport 5000 console in this mode.
When competitor status is displayed, it will
show from left to right the one digit score
(waza ari, yuko, koka), one character for
penalties (K, C, S) and two possible medical
exam indicators (+, +).
This information is repeated for the other
competitor. The data will be display on the
LCD according to the code entered into the All
Sport 5000 console: Blue-White (Code 281) or
White-Blue (Code 284).

Judo Operations

257

18.2 Judo Keys
White and Blue Osaekomi
LCD Display

TIME 4:00 ↓
WHITE OSAEKOMI

Action
 and 
start the Osaekomi timer. The timer displays on
the corresponding opponents side of the
scoreboard. The Osaekomi timer counts up to the
time configured as Ippon time and sounds the horn
unless the selected opponent’s Wazaari is nonzero. If the latter condition is true, the Osaekomi
Timer stops at the configured Wazaari time and
sounds the horn.

Set Osaekomi
LCD Display

WHITE OSAEKOMI
nn:nn
NN:NN = current setting

Action
 and  sets the Osaekomi time for either
competitor (in seconds.)
Notes: This key is disabled while the Osaekomi
Timer is running.
The Osaekomi time displays on the bottom line of
the LCD.

258

Judo Operations

Sono-Mama
LCD Display

Action

TIME 4:00 ↓
SONO-MAMA

 stops the Osaekomi and main
clock and disables the  key. The values of
Osaekomi and main clock are held until the
 key is pressed to resume.
Note: An “S” appears next to the Osaekomi time on
the bottom line of the LCD to show the current
Sono-Mama state.

Yoshi
LCD Display

TIME 4:00
YOSHI

Action

↓

 restarts the Osaekomi and main clock if
they were previously running and stopped by the
 key. The clocks continue counting
from the values on the scoreboard when the timers
were stopped.
Note: This key is disabled when a Sono-Mama is
not currently selected.

Toketa
LCD Display

TIME 4:00
TOKETA

Judo Operations

Action

↓

 stops the Osaekomi timer. Osaekomi
time starts from zero the next time the
 or 
keys are pressed.

259

Clear
LCD Display

TIME 4:00 ↓
CLEAR OSAEK

Action
 clears the Osaekomi time from both
opponents’ sides of the scoreboard.
Note: This key is disabled if the Osaekomi timer is
running or if the Osaekomi timer is currently on.

Win
LCD Display

WHITE WIN
ON

Action
 flashes the Winner indicator for the selected
opponent.

Ippon
LCD Display

WHITE IPPON
ON

260

Action
 lights the Ippon indicator and flashes the
Winner indicator for the selected opponent. The
opponents Winner and Ippon indicators are
cleared.

Judo Operations

Medical Exam
LCD Display

BLUE MEDICAL 1
ON

Max Medical

Action
There are two  keys on the All
Sport 5000. The first press of 
turns on the indicator for the selected opponent
and starts the medical timer. The timer will display
in the Osaekomi digits and the medical indicator
will flash while the timer is running to indicate it is a
medical time.
Pressing  a second time will
stop the timer if it is running. If the timer is not
running, it will turn on the second indicator and
start the timer. Once both medical indicators are
turned on, pressing  will not
allow the medical timer to start. The LCD screen
will show “Max Medical” when the key is pressed.
Pressing the other  key while
the timer is running will switch the indicator and the
timer to the corresponding side of the display and
the timer will continue to run.

Keikoku
LCD Display

WHITE KEIK ON
BLUE WAZAARI N
n = new value

Action
 lights the corresponding penalty
indicator and increments the opposing players
Wazaari by one.
Pressing  a second time clears the
penalty indicator and decrements the opposing
players Wazaari by one.
The LCD shows the current indicator status and the
new Wazaari value for the opposing player.
Note: Any other penalties (Chui or Shido) for the
selected player are cleared when a Keikoku penalty
is assessed. Corresponding Yuko and Koka
opponent values are decremented.

Judo Operations

261

Wazaari
LCD Display

WAZAARI +1
n
N = current value

Action
 and  keys
increment or decrement the selected opponent’s
Wazaari value.
Wazaari values can be 1,2, or zero.

Chui
LCD Display

WHITE CHUI ON
BLUE YUKO n
n = new value

Action
 lights the corresponding penalty indicator
and increments the opposing players Yuko by one.
Pressing  a second time clears the penalty
indicator and decrements the opposing players Yuko
by one.
The LCD shows the current indicator status and the
new Yuko value for the opposing player.
Note: Any other penalties (Keikoku or Shido) for the
selected player are cleared when a Chui penalty is
assessed. Corresponding Wazaari and Koka
opponent values are decremented.

Yuko
LCD Display

YUKO +1
n
N = current value

262

Action
 and  keys increment or
decrement the selected opponent’s Yuko value.
Yuko values can be 1-9 or zero.

Judo Operations

Shido
LCD Display

WHITE SHIDO ON
BLUE KOKA n
n = new value

Action
 lights the corresponding penalty indicator
and increments the opposing players Koka by one.
Pressing  a second time clears the penalty
indicator and decrements the opposing players
Koka by one.
The LCD shows the current indicator status and the
new Koka value for the opposing player.
Note: Any other penalties (Keikoku or Chui) for the
selected player are cleared when a Shido penalty is
assessed. Corresponding Wazaari and Yuko
opponent values are decremented.

Koka
LCD Display

KOKA +1
n
n = current value

Judo Operations

Action
 and  keys increment or
decrement the selected opponent’s Koka value.
Koka values can be 1-9 or zero.

263

18.3 Edit
Yuko/Koka
The Yuko and Koka values are edited in the same way. Yuko is shown as an example.
LCD Display

WHITE YUKO
EDIT n
n = current setting

WHITE Medical
EDIT n
n = current setting

Action
When  is pressed, the current
yuko value is displayed for editing.
The current value is shown in the n position on the
LCD.

When  is pressed, the current
medical value is displayed for editing. Enter the
desired value and press .
The current value is shown in the n position on the
LCD.

18.4 Menu
The  key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport. The
up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list. Pressing a key other
than , , the arrow keys, and other allowed keys exit the Menu function.
New Game
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW GAME?

Action
Press  to clear all of the program data for the
last game played or the game in progress and begin
running the selected sport.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

264

Judo Operations

New Code
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW CODE?

Action
Press  to begin selection of a new code
from the ENTER CODE prompt.
Press  to resume the game in progress
using the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Display Menu
The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the
brightness of the scoreboard.
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN ENTER
DISPLAY MENU?

Action
Press  to select the Display submenu and
show the first prompt on the LCD.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.
(Continued on next page)

Judo Operations

265

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

Action

MENU-DISPLAY RUN
SEG TIMER Y/N

Note: The segment timer function is disabled while
the clock is running.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.

EXIT GAME
ARE YOU SURE Y/N

This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit
the sport code and enter the segment timer.
The SEGMENT TIMER (LL-2475) insert must be
inserted to enter the Segment Timer settings.
Refer to Section 3 for more information on the
segment timer.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.

MENU- Dimming
level (0-9): nn%
nn = current level
None = bright
90% =
80% =
70% =
60% =
50% =
40% =
30% =
20% =
10% =

266

<0>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>

Press <0> through <9> or use the arrow keys <Í>
<Î>, to select the intensity for the digits on the
scoreboard.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data, and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key <Ð> to scroll to the next
selection.
Note: Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products.
Indoor LED and incandescent products only
support one level of dimming at 50%.

Judo Operations

Edit Settings
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
EDIT SETTINGS?

Action
Press  or the right or left arrow key to select
the Settings submenu and show the first prompt on
the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Time of Day
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
SELECT TOD?

Action
Press  or the right arrow key to select the
Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on
the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*12, 2-24 HOUR

Press <1> or <2> to display the time of day in 12
hour (default) or 24 hour format.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
TOD hh:mm:ss*
hh:mm:ss = current setting

Enter the time of day in hours, minutes, and
seconds using the selected format on the number
pad and press .
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*GAME 2-TOD
* = current setting

Press <1> or <2> to display the game clock
(default) or the time of day clock on the
scoreboard.
Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and
return to the game.

Judo Operations

267

18.5 Settings
The user can edit the following settings when EDIT SETTINGS has been selected from the
Main Menu.
Main Clock
LCD Display

MAIN CLOCK-TIME
PERIOD mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Action
Enter the correct amount of time per period in
minutes and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 4:00.
Note: Pressing  to select the period time
as the main clock setting will increment the current
period number if the clock value was previously
zero.

Wazaari Time
LCD Display

OSAEKOMI LIMIT
WAZAARI TIME:nn*
nn = current value

Action
This function sets the configured Wazaari limit for
the Osaekomi Timer. This is the value at which the
Osaekomi Timer will stop if the selected opponents
Wazaari is 1 or greater.
.

Ippon Time
LCD Display

OSAEKOMI LIMIT
IPPON TIME:nn*

Action
This function sets the configured Ippon time for the
Osaekomi Timer. The Osaekomi Timer stops at
this value by default.

nn = current value

268

Judo Operations

Medical Time
LCD Display

Medical Time
0:60

Action
This function sets the configured time for a medical
exam time. The time can be set up to 99 seconds.
Setting the time to 0:00 will disable the timing
function of the medical exam key.

Switch Output
The All Sport 5000 series console has a switch that can be used to drive a number of different
devices. The switch can be configured to operate under different settings. The default
setting is 1-CLOCK= 0.
To display the switch setting that you want to select:
Press the number (0,1,2,3) key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to
the desired setting.
Press  to select the new setting.
Press  or the down arrow key to leave the switch setting and display the next prompt
(please refer to the table on the following page).

Judo Operations

269

The possible settings for the switch output are as follows:
Setting

Result

0-DISABLED
The switch remains open at all times and any
external devices are disabled.

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
0-DISABLED?
n = current setting

1-CLOCK = 0
In count down mode, the switch closes when the
main clock reaches zero and remains closed until a
nonzero value is entered.

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
1-CLOCK =0?
n = current setting

In count up mode, the switch closes when the main
clock reaches the proper period, break, or overtime
length and opens when any other value is entered.

2-CLOCK STOP
The switch closes when the main clock is stopped
and opens when the main clock is running. External
devices are disabled when the main clock is running.

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
2-CLOCK STOP?
n = current setting

3-MAIN HORN
The switch closes when the main horn sounds. This
could be when Auto Horn is enabled and the main
clock reaches zero or when  is pressed.

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
3-MAIN HORN?
n = current setting

Default Settings
Write the settings for this installation in the space (Custom) provided.

270

Custom

Custom

Main Clock Period
Length

4:00

Switch Output

1-Clock = 0

Wazaari Time

20

Ippon Time

25

Medical Time

0:60

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

Judo Operations

Section 19: Boxing Operations
Sport Insert:

0G-96892 Boxing Code 0291

The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section. The Team Name insert and Block
Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A.
Reference Drawings:
Insert, Boxing, Code 291 ....................................................................................Drawing A-096892
Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert. Read Section 2
carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions.
If an insert is lost or damaged, a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be
used until a replacement can be ordered.

19.1 Boxing Keys
Set Round Time/Set Rest Time
 and  have similar functions and are described by
the table below. In the LCD Display window,  is used as an example.
Both buttons will have similar operation procedures but one sets the round time and the
other sets the rest time.
LCD Display

Action

Round Time
Time Nn:nn
Nn:nn = current value

 and  sets
the value for the time indicated in the button title.
Enter the value from the keypad and press
.
Press  twice to cancel the change and
resume match.

Round Number
LCD Display

Round nn*
nn = current value

Action

Edit

 sets the value for the current
round. Enter the value from the keypad and press
.
Press  twice to cancel the selection and
resume match.

Boxing Operations

271

Maximum Round Number
LCD Display

Action

Max Round : Edit
nn*
nn = current value

 sets the value for the
maximum number of rounds in the match. Enter the
value from the keypad and press .
Press  twice to cancel the selection and
resume match.

Round Number +1
LCD Display

Round Nn

Action

+1

 increment the round
number by one.

Nn = new value

19.2 Menu
The  key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport. The
up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list. Pressing a key other
than , , the arrow keys, and other allowed keys, exits the Menu function.
New Game
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW GAME?

Action
Press  to clear all of the program data for the
last game played or the game in progress and begin
running the selected sport.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

272

Boxing Operations

New Code
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW CODE?

Action
Press  to begin selection of a new code from
the ENTER CODE prompt.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Dimming
LCD Display

MENU- Dimming
level (0-9): nn%
nn = current level
None = <0>
90% = <1>
80% = <2>
70% = <3>
60% = <4>
50% = <5>
40% = <6>
30% = <7>
20% = <8>
10% = <9>

Boxing Operations

Action
Press <0> through <9> or use the arrow keys <Í>
<Î>, to select the intensity for the digits on the
scoreboard.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data, and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key <Ð> to scroll to the next
selection.
Note: Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products.
Indoor LED and incandescent products only support
one level of dimming at 50%.

273

Home Roster, Guest Roster
Home Roster and Guest Roster are entered in the same way. Home Roster is used as an
example.
LCD Display

MENU-ROSTER
SELECT HOME

Action
Press  or the right or left arrow key to select
the Home or Guest Roster submenu and show the
first prompt on the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

HOME-TEAM NAME
aaaaaaaaaaaa*
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa =
Boxers name

The TEAM NAME (LL-2441) insert must be
inserted to enter the Team Name Message
Center (TNMC) settings.
The TNMC is updated after each selection is
completed.
Use the COLUMNS, ROWS and STROKE keys to
select the WIDTH, HEIGHT and FONT of the
TNMC. The defaults are 48 columns, 8 rows and
single stroke.
Enter up to fifteen (15) characters for the team
name and press .
Reinsert the Boxing (LL-2433) insert to
continue.

274

Boxing Operations

Display Menu
The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the
brightness of the scoreboard.
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN ENTER
DISPLAY MENU?

Action
Press  to select the Display submenu and
show the first prompt on the LCD.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

MENU-DISPLAY RUN
SEG TIMER Y/N

Note: The segment timer function is disabled while
the clock is running.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.

EXIT GAME
ARE YOU SURE Y/N

This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit the
sport code and enter the segment timer
The SEGMENT TIMER (LL-2475) insert must be
inserted to enter the Segment Timer settings.
Refer to Section 2 for more information on the
Segment Timer.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
BLANK GAME DATA?

Boxing Operations

If 2-tod is selected, this message will be displayed.
Press  to blank all game data on the
scoreboard except for the Time of Day digits.

275

Auto Time
The Auto Time option allows the user to choose automatic time transitions. If turned ON, the
time will automatically switch between round and rest time. If OFF is selected, this change
must be done manually. ON is the default and is recommended.
LCD Display

Auto Time on
1 – on, 2 - off
Nn = new value

Action
Press<1> to turn ON the Auto Time selection.
Press<2> to turn OFF the Auto Time selection.
Press the down arrow to scroll to the next selection.
Press  to leave the menu.

Time of Day
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
SELECT TOD?

Action
Press  or the right arrow key to select the Time
of Day submenu and show the first prompt on the
LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*12, 2-24 HOUR

Press <1> or <2> to display the time of day in 12 hour
(default) or 24 hour format.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
TOD hh:mm:ss*

Enter the time of day in hours, minutes, and seconds
using the selected format on the number pad and
press .

hh:mm:ss = current setting
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*GAME 2-tod
* = current setting

276

Press <1> or <2> to display the game clock (default)
or the time of day clock on the scoreboard.
Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and return
to the game.

Boxing Operations

19.3 Edit
Though  is not disabled for this sport code, the buttons available on the insert are
able to edit the settings without the use of the  button. Therefore, this manual lists no
function for the  button.

Boxing Operations

277

Section 20: Strikeout Count
Sport Insert:

0G-163409 Strikeout Count Code 5099

The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section. The Team Name insert and Block
Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A.
Reference Drawings:
Insert, Strikeout Count, Code 5099 ....................................................................Drawing A-163409
Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert. Read Section 2
carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions.
If an insert is lost or damaged, a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be
used until a replacement can be ordered.

20.1 Strikeout Keys
Season Strikeouts
LCD Display

Total :
Nnnn

Action

Edit

Nnnn = current value

 sets the value for the
season total strikeouts. Enter the value from the
keypad and press 

Game Strikeouts
LCD Display

Cur Value : Edit
Nnn*
Nnn = current value

Strikeout Count

Action
 sets the value for the
current game strikeouts. Enter the value from the
keypad and press .

279

Strikeouts +1, -1
LCD Display

Cur value : +1
Nn
Nn = new value

Action
 and 
increment and decrement the strikeout count for the
game and season by one.
The selected frame for the game strikeout count is
sent through the RTD port each time the key is
pressed.

Display Control Keys
The display control keys will send the selected frame command through the RTD port.
Pressing these keys will initiate the display of that frame on the Venus® series matrix control
system. The frames will be sent as Enhanced RTD Fields and have the following protocols:
19,200 baud; 8 data bits; no parity.
The frame number for each of the keys is listed below.
 ------------------------------Frame 1
 ---------------------------------Frame 2
 ---------------------------------Frame 3
 ---------------------------------Frame 4
 ---------------------------------Frame 5
 ---------------------------------Frame 6
 ---------------------------------Frame 7
 ---------------------------------Frame 8
 ---------------------------------Frame 9
 ---------------------------------Frame 10
---------------------Frame 11 + the strikeout count
(example: 0 strikeouts = Frame 11)
1 strikeout
= Frame 12)
2 strikeouts = Frame 13)

280

Strikeout Count

20.2 Menu
The  key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport. The
up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list. Pressing a key other
than , , the arrow keys, and other allowed keys exits the Menu function.
New Game
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW GAME?

Action
Press  to clear all of the program data for the
last game played or the game in progress and begin
running the selected sport.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

New Code
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW CODE?

Action
Press  to begin selection of a new code from the
ENTER CODE prompt.
Press  to resume the game in progress using the
current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection.

Strikeout Count

281

Dimming
LCD Display

Action

MENU- Dimming
level (0-9): nn%
nn = current level
None = bright
90% =
80% =
70% =
60% =
50% =
40% =
30% =
20% =
10% =

<0>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>

Press <0> through <9> or use the arrow keys <Í>
<Î>, to select the intensity for the digits on the
scoreboard.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data, and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key <Ð> to scroll to the next
selection.
Note: Dim levels pertain to outdoor incandescent
products. Indoor LED products only support one level
of dimming at 50%.

20.3 Edit
Strikeouts +1, -1
LCD Display

Strikeouts
EDIT nn
nn = current setting

Action
When  and  or 
and  is pressed, the current value
of strikeouts for the game is displayed for editing.
Enter the new value for strikeouts for that game and
press . This changes the value of strikeouts
for the current game and adjusts the season strikeout
totals.
Press  to cancel the selection and return to
the game in progress.

282

Strikeout Count

Section 21: Cricket Operations
Sport Insert:

0G-164973 Cricket Code 5599

The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section. The Team Name insert and Block
Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A.
Reference Drawings:
Insert; Cricket, Code 5599 ..................................................................................Drawing A-164973
Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert. Read Section 2
carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions.
If an insert is lost or damaged, a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be
used until a replacement can be ordered.

21.1 Cricket Keys
Once the code for a cricket match is entered, the console will power up with the Home side
selected for display on the scoreboard. If the Guest side is to start first the  key
will need to be pressed for the Guest team. The LCD on the console will show which team is
up and their team score, the wicket number, the overs remaining, and the inning number as
shown below.

HOME 123 INNG 1
OVER 50 WICK 2
The scores of all eleven batsman and the extras will be added together for the total team
score. When a new game is started all of the scores will be set to zero. The Runs +1 will
increment the score for the batsman that is currently selected for that key. When a new
batsman number is selected the score on the scoreboard will change to show that batsman’s
score.

Cricket Operations

283

Batsman Left, Batsman Right
 and  set the Home and Guest Batsman numbers
for the players that are currently batting.
LCD Display

home batsman
left nn*
Nn = current value

Action
Press Home or Guest  to set
the left batsman's number for that team. The
current setting will show on the LCD. When
finished, do the same for the right batsman.
Use the keypad to enter a new number and press
. The number can only be set from 1 to
11. The number will default to 11 if any number
above eleven is entered.

Runs +1, +4, +6
LCD Display

left runs: +1
home nn*
nn = current setting

Action
Press the appropriate run key (,
, ) to increment the total
number of runs for the left or right batsman.
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the
new value for the corresponding batter.

Runs -1
 is used to make corrections if an entry error has occurred.
LCD Display

left runs: -1
home nn
nn = current setting

Action
Press the appropriate  key to
decrement the total number of runs for the left or
right batsman.
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the
new value for the corresponding batter.

284

Cricket Operations

Extras +1
LCD Display

Action

Extra runs: +1
home nn
nn = current setting

Press the appropriate  key to
increment the total number of extra runs for the
Home or Guest team.
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the
new value for the game.

Extras -1
 is used to make corrections if an entry error has occurred.
LCD Display

Action

Extra runs: -1
home nn
nn = current setting

Press the appropriate  key to
increment the total number of extra runs for the
Home or Guest team.
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the
new value for the game.

Wickets +1
LCD Display

Wickets:
nn

Action

+1

nn = current setting

Press the appropriate  key to
decrement the wicket number for the game.
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the
new value for the game.

Wickets -1
 is used to make corrections if an entry error has occurred.
LCD Display

wickets:
nn

Action

-1

nn = current setting

Cricket Operations

Press the appropriate  key to
increment the wicket number for the game.
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the
new value for the game.

285

Overs +1
LCD Display

Overs: +1
nn
nn = current setting

Action
Press the appropriate  key to
increment the number of overs for the game.
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the
new value for the game.

Overs -1
 is used to make corrections if an entry error has occurred.
LCD Display

Overs: -1
nn
nn = current setting

286

Action
Press the appropriate  key to
decrement the total number of overs for the game.
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the
new value for the game.

Cricket Operations

Inning #1, Inning #2
LCD Display

Change Inning?
are you sure y/n
Y =  key
N =  key

Action
Press the appropriate  or  key to select an inning for the home or guest
team to score and display on the scoreboard.
The console will ask if you are sure you want to
change innings. Press if you want to
change the inning or  if you do not.

21.2 Edit
Runs +1, +2, +3, -1
LCD Display

TEAM runs-EDIT
HOME
nnn*
nn = current setting

Action
Press  and any of the RUNS keys for the home
or guest team to display the current team runs setting.
Enter the correct number of runs on the number pad
and press .

Extras +1, -1
LCD Display

extras-EDIT
HOME
nn*
nn = current setting

Action

Press  and one of the EXTRAS keys for the
home or guest team to display the current extras
setting.
Enter the correct number of extras on the number pad
and press .

Cricket Operations

287

Wickets +1, -1
LCD Display

Wickets-EDIT
nn*
nn = current setting

Action
Press  and one of the WICKETS keys to
display the wickets setting.
Enter the correct wickets number on the number
pad and press .

Overs +1, -1
LCD Display

overs-EDIT
nn*
nn = current setting

Action
Press  and one of the OVERS keys to
display the overs setting.
Enter the correct overs on the number pad and
press .

21.3 Menu
The  key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport. The
up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list. Pressing a key other
than , , the arrow keys, and other allowed keys exits the Menu function.
New Game
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW GAME?

Action
Press  to clear all of the program data for the
last game played or the game in progress and begin
running the selected sport.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

288

Cricket Operations

New Code
LCD Display

Action

MENU-MAIN
NEW CODE?

Press  to begin selection of a new code from
the ENTER CODE prompt.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Dimming
LCD Display

Action

MENU- Dimming
level (0-9): nn%
nn = current level
None = bright
90% =
80% =
70% =
60% =
50% =
40% =
30% =
20% =
10% =

Cricket Operations

<0>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>

Press <0> through <9> or use the arrow keys <Í>
<Î>, to select the intensity for the digits on the
scoreboard.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data, and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key <Ð> to scroll to the next
selection.
Note: Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products.
Indoor LED and incandescent products only support
one level of dimming at 50%.

289

Home Roster, Guest Roster
Home Roster and Guest Roster are entered in the same way. Home Roster is used as an
example.
LCD Display

MENU-ROSTER
SELECT HOME

Action
Press  or the right or left arrow key to select
the Home or Guest Roster submenu and show the
first prompt on the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress
using the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

HOME-TEAM NAME
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa*
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa =
Team name

The TEAM NAME (LL-2441) insert must be
inserted to enter the Team Name Message
Center (TNMC) settings.
The TNMC is updated after each selection is
completed.
Use the COLUMNS, ROWS and STROKE keys to
select the WIDTH, HEIGHT and FONT of the
TNMC. The defaults are 48 columns, 8 rows and
single stroke.
Enter up to fifteen (15) characters for the team
name and press .
Reinsert the Cricket (OG-164973) insert to
continue.

Inning Settings Menu
The INNING SETTINGS MENU allows the user to set the default number of overs in an
inning.
LCD Display

Inning settings
overs: NN
Nn = current setting

290

Action
Enter the number of OVERS to be set as the default
for each inning.
Press  to accept the new value.

Cricket Operations

Time of Day
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
SELECT TOD?

Action
Press  or the right arrow key to select the
Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on
the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*12, 2-24 HOUR

Press <1> or <2> to display the time of day in 12
hour (default) or 24 hour format.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
TOD hh:mm:ss*
hh:mm:ss = current setting

Enter the time of day in hours, minutes, and
seconds using the selected format on the number
pad and press .
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*GAME 2-tod
* = current setting

Cricket Operations

Press <1> or <2> to display the game clock
(default) or the time of day clock on the scoreboard.
Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and
return to the game.

291

Section 22: Water Polo Operations
Sport Insert: 0G-178439
The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section. The Team Name insert and Block
Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A.
Reference Drawings:
Block Diagrams, A/S5000/3000 Hockey.............................................................Drawing A-124689
Insert, Team Name .............................................................................................Drawing A-125290
Insert, Water Polo ...............................................................................................Drawing A-178439
Refer to the information in Section 2 of ED-11976 to start up the console and use the sport insert.
Read Section 2, Basic Operation of ED-11976 carefully to fully understand the following operation
instructions.
If an insert is lost or damaged, a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be
used until a replacement can be ordered.
Use the labels provided in Appendix B to attach the correct code number label to the sport insert in
the appropriate location. Write the code number in the space provided below.
Write the correct code number here.

If you do not know the code number to enter for your scoreboard, refer to Appendix B in this
manual. If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard, refer to the Installation and
Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard.

22.1 Water Polo Keys
Time Out On/Off
 stops and starts the time out clock. The length of both the full and
partial time outs can also be changed when the time out clock is stopped.
Note 1: Only the time outs configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the
LCD and available for selection.
Note 2: The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs
(please refer to the table on the following page).

Water Polo Operations

293

LCD Display

TIME OUT-SELECT
FULL MM:SS
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Action
Press  to display the
configured time for full time out length.
To accept the full time out length, press .
To decline the selection of the full time out length,
press .
To change the full time out length, enter the new
length in minutes and seconds on the number pad
and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return to
the game.

TIME OUT-SELECT
PARTIAL MM:SS
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Press  a second time to
display the configured time for partial time out length.
To accept the partial time out length, press .
To decline the selection of the partial time out length,
press .
To change the partial time out length, enter the new
length in minutes and seconds on the number pad
and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return to
the game.

Enable Penalty Clocks
Press  to allow the penalty clocks to count when the main
clock is on.
Disable Penalty Clocks
Press  to disable the penalty clocks from counting when the
main clock is on.

294

Water Polo Operations

Period +1
LCD Display

period +1
n
n = current setting

Action
Press  to increment the period number.
A prompt showing period number displays briefly.

Time Out
The home and guest  keys are used to decrement the number of time outs
remaining and start the time out clock. The scoreboard indicator is turned on when the type
of time out is selected (full or partial). The scoreboard indicator is turned off when the time
out clock expires or is stopped.
Note 1: Only the types (full or partial) of time outs that were configured in the EDIT
SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection.
Note 2: The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs
(please refer to the table on the following page).

Water Polo Operations

295

LCD Display

TIME OUT-HOME
FULL?
n
n = current setting

Action
Press  to display the number of full time
outs remaining.
To accept the full time out and start the time out clock,
press . Full time out decrements.
To decline the selection of a full time out, press .
Full time out does not decrement.
Note: The up and down arrow keys can also be used
to select the full and partial time outs.

TIME OUT-HOME
PARTIAL? n
n = current setting

Press  a second time to display the
number of partial time outs remaining.
To accept the partial time out and start the time out
clock, press . Partial time out decrements.
To decline the selection of a partial time out, press
. Partial time out does not decrement.
Note: The up and down arrow keys can also be used
to select the full and partial time outs.

TIME OUT-HOME
NO TIME OUTS

296

This message appears when there are no time outs
left.

Water Polo Operations

Player Penalty Start
LCD Display

home plyr/pen
Player o1*
nn = current setting

Action
Press  to start a new
penalty time for the home or guest team.
The penalty time will start to count immediately.
On the number pad, enter the jersey number of the
player with the penalty, and press .

home plyr/pen
penalty #n*

Enter the penalty number of this penalty, and press
.

n = penalty number

Set Main Clock
LCD Display

MAIN CLOCK -SET
CURR mm:ss.t*
mm:ss.t = minutes,
seconds,
tenths of a second

Action
After the main clock has been stopped, press
 to display the current time of the
main clock.
To change the time, enter the desired time on the
number pad and press .
Press  twice to clear changes and return to
the game.

Water Polo Operations

297

Score
The home and guest  keys are used to increment and decrement their
respective totals.
LCD Display

TEAM score-edit
HOME
nnn
nnn = current setting

Action
Press the appropriate key to increment or decrement
the total for the home or guest team. For example,
.
Enter the correct number on the number pad and
press .
The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new
value for the team score of the corresponding team.

Clear All Penalties
Press  to delete all of the penalties for the home or guest team.
LCD Display

HOME PLYR/PEN
CLEAR ALL Y/N?

Action
Press  to clear the penalties for all players in
the roster.
Press  to decline the selection and return to the
game.

Delete Penalty
Press  to delete a single penalty for the home or guest team.
LCD Display

home del pen?
1 pnn pn nn:nn
nn = current setting

298

Action
Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll to the correct
penalty and press .
Press  to decline the selection and return to
the game.

Water Polo Operations

22.2 Edit
The  key allows the user to select and edit the following scoreboard fields.
Press  and the key for the home or guest field to be edited.
Time Out
Note 1: Only the time outs configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the
LCD and available for selection.
Note 2: The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs.
LCD Display

TIME OUT-HOME
FULL
n*
n = current setting

Action
Press   for the home or guest
team to display the current setting of full time outs
remaining.
Enter the correct number of full time outs on the
number pad and press .

TIME OUT-HOME
PARTIAL n*
n = current setting

Press   for the home or guest
team a second time or the down arrow key to display
the current setting of full time outs remaining.
Enter the correct number of partial time outs on the
number pad and press .

Score
The home and guest  keys are all edited in the same way.
LCD Display

TEAM score-edit
HOME
nnn
nnn = current setting

Action
Press  and the appropriate statistic key to
display the current setting. For example, .
Enter the correct number on the number pad and
press .

Water Polo Operations

299

Period +1
LCD Display

Period edit
n
n = current setting

Action
Press   to display the current
quarter setting.
Enter the correct quarter number on the number pad
and press . The full time outs are reset.

Time Out On/Off
LCD Display

TIME OUTs-edit
FULL MM:SS
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

TIME OUT- edit
PARTIAL MM:SS
mm:ss = minutes, seconds

Action
Press   to display the
current time setting for full time outs.
Enter the correct time on the number pad and press
.

Press  a second time or the
down arrow key to display the configured time for
partial time out length.
Enter the correct time on the number pad and press
.

300

Water Polo Operations

22.3 Menu
The  key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport. The
up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list. Pressing a key other
than , , the arrow keys, and other allowed keys, exits the Menu function.
The Menu function should be used at the beginning of each new game to edit the Home and
Guest Rosters.
New Game
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW GAME?

Action
Press  to clear all of the program data for the
last game played or the game in progress and begin
running the selected sport.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

New Code
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
NEW CODE?

Action
Press  to begin selection of a new code from
the ENTER CODE prompt.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

Water Polo Operations

301

Home Roster, Guest Roster
Home Roster and Guest Roster are entered in the same way. Home Roster is used as an
example.
LCD Display

MENU-ROSTER
SELECT HOME

Action
Press  or the right or left arrow key to select
the Home or Guest Roster submenu and show the
first prompt on the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

HOME-TEAM NAME
aaaaaaaaaaaaa*

The TEAM NAME (LL-2441) insert must be
inserted to enter the Team Name Message
Center (TNMC) settings.
The TNMC is updated after each selection is
completed.
Use the COLUMNS, ROWS and STROKE keys to
select the WIDTH, HEIGHT and FONT of the
TNMC. The defaults are 48 columns, 8 rows and
single stroke.
Enter up to fifteen (15) characters for the team
name and press .
Reinsert the HOCKEY (LL-2436) insert to
continue.

302

Water Polo Operations

Display Menu
The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the
brightness of the scoreboard.
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN ENTER
DISPLAY MENU?

Action
Press  to select the Display submenu and
show the first prompt on the LCD.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

MENU-DISPLAY RUN
SEG TIMER Y/N

Note: The segment timer function is disabled while
the clock is running.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.

EXIT GAME
ARE YOU SURE Y/N

This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit the
sport code and enter the segment timer
The SEGMENT TIMER (LL-2475) insert must be
inserted to enter the Segment Timer settings.
Refer to Section 3 for more information on the
segment timer.
Press  to exit the sport code and run the
segment timer program.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to the
next selection.
(Continued on next page)

Water Polo Operations

303

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

Action

MENU- Dimming
level (0-9): nn%
nn = current level
None = bright
90% =
80% =
70% =
60% =
50% =
40% =
30% =
20% =
10% =

<0>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>

Press <0> through <9> or use the arrow keys <Í>
<Î>, to select the intensity for the digits on the
scoreboard.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data, and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key <Ð> to scroll to the next
selection.
Note: Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products.
Indoor LED and incandescent products only support
one level of dimming at 50%.

Edit Settings
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
edit SETTINGS?

Action
Press  or the right or left arrow key to select the
settings submenu and show the first prompt on the
LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using the
current data and exit the Menu.
Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
selection.

304

Water Polo Operations

Time of Day
LCD Display

MENU-MAIN
SELECT TOD?

Action
Press  or the right arrow key to select the
Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on
the LCD.
Press  to resume the game in progress using
the current data and exit the Menu.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*12, 2-24 HOUR

Press <1> or <2> to display the time of day in 12
hour (default) or 24 hour format.
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
TOD hh:mm:ss*
hh:mm:ss = current setting

Enter the time of day in hours, minutes, and
seconds using the selected format on the number
pad and press .
Press  or the down arrow key to scroll to
the next selection.

MENU-TIME OF DAY
1*GAME 2-tod
* = current setting

MENU-TIME OF DAY
BLANK GAME DATA?

Water Polo Operations

Press <1> or <2> to display the game clock
(default) or the time of day clock on the scoreboard.
Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and
return to the game.

If 2-tod is selected, this message will be displayed.
Press  to blank all game data on the
scoreboard except for the Time of Day digits.

305

22.4 Settings
The user can edit the following settings when EDIT SETTINGS has been selected from the
Main Menu.
Main Clock
Note 1: The settings entered for Main Clock are used with the  key.
Note 2: The period, break, and overtime lengths are used differently depending on the
direction of the main clock. For count down, the main clock is set to the selected length,
decrements towards zero, and stops at zero. For count up, the main clock is set to zero,
increments towards the selected length, and stops when the selected length is reached.
LCD Display

MAIN CLOCK-MODE
TENTH SECOND? n
n = current setting

Action
When the main clock is set to count down and tenths
of a second is selected, the main clock displays in
tenths of a second remaining when the time is below
one minute.
Press  to set the main clock to display tenths of
a second.
Press  to display whole seconds.

MAIN CLOCK-TIME
PERIOD mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Enter the correct amount of time per period in minutes
and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 20:00 per period.
Note: Pressing  to select the period time as
the main clock setting will increment the current period
number if the clock value was previously zero.
(Continued on next page)

306

Water Polo Operations

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

MAIN CLOCK-TIME
BREAK mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Action
Set the amount of time between periods.
Enter the correct amount of time for break length in
minutes and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 1:00.

MAIN CLOCK-TIME
OVERTIME mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Set the amount of time for the overtime periods.
Enter the correct amount of time for overtime periods
in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 5:00.

Shot Clock
LCD Display

SHOT CLOCK-TIME
RESET mm:ss*
mm:ss = current setting

Action
This setting is used by the RESET button on the
remote shot clock control console.
Note: The current setting for the RESET time displays
on the LCD until the first number key is pressed.
Enter the correct amount of reset time in minutes and
seconds on the number pad and press .
For example, 00:45.
(Continued on next page)

Water Polo Operations

307

(Continued from previous page)

LCD Display

SHOT CLOCK-MODE
SYNC W/ MAIN?

Action
Press  to synchronize the shot clock with the
main clock.
If  for the main clock is pressed while the
main and shot clocks are running, the shot clock
stops. The shot clock restarts when  is
pressed for the main clock.
Press  to allow the shot clock to run
independently of the main clock. The shot clock starts
and stops only with the switch on the remote shot
clock control console

SHOT CLOCK-MODE
AUTO BLANK?

Press  to blank the shot clock time when the
shot clock time is greater than or equal to the main
clock time. The shot clock is reset and stopped when
the display is blanked to eliminate inadvertent
sounding of shot clock horn.
Press  to display the shot clock time at all times.

Penalty Time
Default times can be set for the minor and major penalty keys. The minor penalty time is
used as the default when first entering the player penalty function.
LCD Display

Penalty time
set mm:ss
mm:ss = current setting

Action
Enter the correct default time for a penalty in minutes
and seconds on the number pad and press the
 key.
For example, 0:25.
The penalty time is used as the default when pressing
the player penalty start function.

308

Water Polo Operations

Time Outs
Note 1: If a full or partial time out is not needed for the HOME or GUEST 
keys, enter zero for the number of time outs.
Note 2: If a full or partial time out is not needed for , enter zero for
the time.
Note3: The number for each type of time out must be manually entered for an overtime
period using the   key sequence for each team.
LCD Display

TIME OUTS-MODE
FULL
n*

Action
Enter the number of full time outs on the number pad
and press .

n = current setting

TIME OUTS-TIME
FULL mm:ss*
mm:ss = current setting

Enter the amount of time for a full time out in minutes
and seconds on the number pad and press
.
For example, 1:00.

TIME OUTS-MODE
SHOW ON MAIN? n
n = current setting

Press  to display the time out time on the LCD
and the main clock digits of the scoreboard while the
time out clock is active.
Press  to display the time out time on the LCD
only.

Water Polo Operations

309

Switch Output
The All Sport 5000 series console has a switch that can be used to drive a number of different
devices. The switch can be configured to operate under different settings. The default setting
is 1-CLOCK= 0.
To display the switch setting that you want to select:
Press the number (0,1,2,3) key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll
to the desired setting.
Press  to select the new setting.
Press  or the down arrow key to leave the switch setting and display the next
prompt.
The possible settings for the switch output are as follows:
Setting

Result

0-DISABLED

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
0-DISABLED?

The switch remains open at all times and any
external devices are disabled.

n = current setting
1-CLOCK = 0

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
1-CLOCK =0?

In count down mode, the switch closes when the
main clock reaches zero and remains closed until a
nonzero value is entered.

n = current setting
In count up mode, the switch closes when the main
clock reaches the proper period, break, or overtime
length and opens when any other value is entered.

2-CLOCK STOP

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
2-CLOCK STOP?

The switch closes when the main clock is stopped
and opens when the main clock is running. External
devices are disabled when the main clock is running.

n = current setting

3-MAIN HORN

SWITCH OUTPUT=n
3-MAIN HORN?
n = current setting

310

The switch closes when the main horn sounds. This
could be when the auto horn is enabled and the
main clock reaches zero or when  is
pressed.

Water Polo Operations

Default Settings
Write the settings for this installation in the space (Custo ) provided.
Setting

Default

Tenth of a Second

Yes

Period Length

15:00

Break Length

10:00

Overtime Length

5:00

Minor Penalty

0:25

Full Time Outs

1

Full Time Out

1:00

Partial Time Outs

0

Partial Time Out

0:00

Switch Output

1-Clock = 0

Water Polo Operations

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

311

Appendix A: Reference Drawings
In this appendix, the following drawings are filed in numerical order by drawing number.
Track/Football SCBD w/ Finish Lynx, in Press Box (option #3) ................................Drawing A-095152
Track/Football SCBD w/ Finish Lynx, in Field ...........................................................Drawing A-095153
Track/Football SCBD w/ Finish Lynx, in Press Box (option #2) ................................Drawing A-095154
Rear View, A/S 5010 Connector Assignments ............................................................... Drawing A-102142
LAYOUT; 8 COLUMN DRIVER III .............................................................................Drawing A-123941
Block Diagram, A/S 5000/3000 BB, VB & WR #1 .......................................................... Drawing A-124686
Block Diagram, A/S 5000/3000 BB, VB & WR #3 .......................................................... Drawing A-124688
Block Diagram, A/S 5000/3000 Hockey .......................................................................... Drawing A-124689
Block Diagram, A/S 5000/3000 Outdoor Sports............................................................. Drawing A-124690
A/S 5000 Track w/ OmniSport Timer .........................................................................Drawing A-125039
Schematic, Dual ¼” Phone J-Box w/Shunt Jack............................................................ Drawing A-125316
Block Diagram, A/S 5000 BB, VB & WR #2 .................................................................... Drawing A-125415
All Sport 5000, 25 Pin PCB J-Box Wiring........................................................................ Drawing A-125416
Block Diagram; A/S 3000 or 5000 BB, VB & WR #4 .................................................Drawing A-125417
Channel Selection; Single Control Console, Gen IV ................................................. Drawing A-180566
Channel Selection; Single Broadcast Group, Gen IV ................................................ Drawing A-180922
Channel Selection; Multiple Broadcast Group, Gen IV ............................................. Drawing A-180923
Speed Adjust Calculations, Radar Gun ..................................................................... Drawing A-243741

Reference Drawings

313

Appendix B: Sport Inserts
Sport Insert Drawings:
Insert; Event Counter Codes 371-376 ......................................................................Drawing A-058047
Insert; Tae Kwan Do, Code 283................................................................................Drawing A-096889
Insert; Karate Code 282............................................................................................Drawing A-096890
Insert; Judo Code 281...............................................................................................Drawing A-096891
Insert; Boxing, Code 291 ..........................................................................................Drawing A-096892
Custom Insert, Karate Code 285 ..............................................................................Drawing A-098374
Custom Insert, Karate Code 286 ..............................................................................Drawing A-098375
Custom Insert, Judo Code 284 .................................................................................Drawing A-098376
Insert, Basketball, LL-2433 .......................................................................................Drawing A-120121
Insert, A/S 5000, Football .........................................................................................Drawing A-122652
Insert, LL-2436, Hockey/Handball/Lacrosse.............................................................Drawing A-124218
Insert; A/S 5000, Wrestling .......................................................................................Drawing A-124701
Insert; Volleyball........................................................................................................Drawing A-125055
Insert; A/S 5000, Baseball ........................................................................................Drawing A-125061
Insert; A/S 5000, Track .............................................................................................Drawing A-125094
Insert; A/S 5000, Soccer ...........................................................................................Drawing A-125215
Insert, Team Name ...................................................................................................Drawing A-125290
Insert; A/S 5000, Segment Timer..............................................................................Drawing A-129357
Insert; A/S 5000, Pitch & Speed ...............................................................................Drawing A-130895
Insert; A/S 5000, Tennis ...........................................................................................Drawing A-131274
Insert; A/S 5000, Smart Clock Codes 1000 & 6000..................................................Drawing A-136301
Insert; A/S 5000, Strikeout ........................................................................................Drawing A-163409
Insert; Cricket ............................................................................................................Drawing A-164973
Insert; A/S 5000, Water Polo ....................................................................................Drawing A-178439

Sport Inserts

315

Appendix C: Sports Code Numbers
Reference Drawings:
Address Table, 1 through 128........................................................................... Drawing A-115078
Address Table, 129 through 256 ...................................................................... Drawing A-115079
Protocol Table, 1 through 15............................................................................. Drawing A-115081
4 Column LED Driver II ..................................................................................... Drawing A-123783
Relay Driver ...................................................................................................... Drawing A-123791
A/S 5000 Capable TNMC ................................................................................. Drawing A-123794
16 Column Driver III .......................................................................................... Drawing A-123940
8 Column Driver III ............................................................................................ Drawing A-123941
A/S 5000 Current Loop Output Specification.................................................... Drawing A-128429
16 Column LED Driver II ................................................................................... Drawing A-126174
16 Digit w/ Charger ........................................................................................... Drawing A-145791
Spec; LED Driver IV, 16 Col ............................................................................. Drawing A-288137
Notes:
1) All scoreboards are controlled by a 16 column LED, incandescent, or glow cube driver
except where noted by the column numbers to configure for a 4 column LED or an 8
column incandescent driver.
2) Use drawings A-115078 and A-115079 when setting the address for a 16 column LED or
incandescent driver.
3) Use drawing A-123783 for a 4 column LED driver and drawing A-123941 for an 8
column incandescent driver when setting the address and column numbers.
4) Use drawing A-145791 for a 16 column glow cube driver when setting the address and
protocol numbers.

C.1

Indoor Model Numbers

Model

Address

Basketball

Volleyball

Wrestling

Hockey

Football

BB-114

17

1105

2105

3105

4105

6105

BB-1113

12

1101,1102

2101

3101,3102

BB-1813

12

1101,1102 1

2101,2111 2

3101,3102 3

BB-2014

1 + Columns 5-8

All

BB-2015

1

All

All 4

All 4

BB-2021

12

1101,1102

2101

3101,3102

BB-2023

1

All

All 4

All 4

12

1101,1102 1

2101,2111 2

3101,3102 3

2101

3101,3102

BB-2025

All

BB-2026

1 + Columns 5-8

All

BB-2027

12

1101,1102

BB-2028

12

1101,1102 1

2101,2111 2

3101,3102 3

BB-2029

1

All

All 4

All 4

BB-2031

13

1101,1102 1

2101,2111 2

3101,3102 3

BB-2032

13

1101,1102 1

2101,2111 2

3101,3102 3

All 4

All

All 4

All
All

All 4

All

All 4

All

BB-2033

1

All

All 4

All 4

BB-2039

12

1101,1102

2101

3101,3102

BB-2041

12,14

1105

2105

3105

4105

6105

BB-2042

12,14

1105

2105

3105

4105

6105

Sports Code Numbers

317

Model

Address

Basketball

Volleyball

Wrestling

Hockey

Football

BB-2046

12,14

1105

2105

3105

4105

6105

BB-2047

12,14

1105

2105

3105

4105

6105

BB-2101

17

1105

2105

3105

4105

6105

BB-2102

17

1105

2105

3105

4105

6105

BB-2103

17

1101,1102 1

2101,2111 2

3101,3102 3

BB-2104

17

1101,1102 1

2101,2111 2

3101,3102 3

BB-2105

17

1105

2105

3105

4105

6105

BB-2106

17

1105

2105

3105

4105

6105

BB-2107

17

1101,1102 1

2101,2111 2

3101,3102 3

BB-2108

17

1101,1102 1

2101,2111 2

3101,3102 3

BB-2109

1

All

All 4

All 4

All 4

All

BB-2111

1

All

All 4

All 4

All 4

All

17

1101,1102 1

2101,2111 2

3101,3102 3

BB-2112
BB-2114

1 + Columns 5-8

All

BB-2115

1

All

All 4

All 4

All 4

All
All

BB-2116

17

1105

2105

3105

4105

6105

BB-2117

14

1105

2105

3105

4105

6105

BB-2119

17

1101,1102 1

2101,2111 2

3101,3102 3

BB-2120

14

1105

2105

3105

4105

6105

BB-2121

17

1105

2105

3105

4105

6105

BB-2122

17

1105

2105

3105

4105

6105

BB-2123

17,14

1105

2105

3105

4105

6105

BB-2124

17,14

1105

2105

3105

4105

6105

BB-2125

17

1101,1102 1

2101,2111 2

3101,3102 3

BB-2126

17

1101,1102 1

2101,2111 2

3101,3102 3

BB-2127

14

1105

2105

3105

4105

6105

BB-2128

1

All

All 4

All 4

All 4

All

BB-2129

1

All

All 4

All 4

All 4

All

BB-2130

1

All

All 4

All 4

All 4

All

BB-2131

1

All

All 4

All 4

All 4

All

BB-2132

1

All

All 4

All 4

All 4

All

BB-2137

n/a

1101,1102 1

2101,2111 2

3101,3102 3

BB-2142

17

1101

2101

3101

4105

6105

BB-2145

17

1101

2101

3101

4105

6105

BB-2146

17

1101

2101

3101

4105

6105

BB-2147

17

1101

2101

3101

4105

6105

BB-4413

12

1101,1102

2101

3101,3102

BB-7213

12

1101,1102 1

2101,2111 2

3101,3102 3

FP-15

21,22

1101,1102

2101,2111

FP-257

23,24,25,26

1101,1102

2101,2111

H-213

n/a

H-413

74

4401,4402

H-613

72,73

4401,4402

H-1013

72,73

H-2020

71

318

3101
4402

4401,4402
1402

2402

4401,4402

Sports Code Numbers

Model

Address

Basketball

Volleyball

Wrestling

Hockey

H-2021

71,72,73

4401,4402

H-2022

71,72,73

4401,4402

H-2023

71,72,73

1402

2402

4402

H-2024

71,72,73

1402

2402

4402

H-2025

71,72

4401

H-2026

71,72

4401

H-2030

71,72,73

4401,4402

H-2031

71,72,73

4401,4402

H-2101

71

1401,1402

2401,2402

4401,4402

H-2102

72 or 73

1401,1402

2401,2402

4401,4402

H-2103

n/a

1402

2402

4402

H-2104

71,72,73

1402

2402

4402

H-2105

71,72,73

1402

2402

4402

H-2106

71,72,73

1402

2402

4401,4402

H-2107

71,72,73

1402

2402

4401,4402

H-2108

71,72,73

4401,4402

H-2109

71,72,73

4401,4402

H-2111

71

1401,1402

2401,2402

4401,4402

H-2112

71

1401,1402

2401,2402

4401,4402

H-2114

74

1401,1402

2401,2402

4401,4402

H-2115

72,73

MS-2016

13

1103

2103

3103

SD-2001

23,24,25,26

1101,1102

2101

3101

SD-2002

23,24,25,26,27,28

1101,1102

SD-2003

15

SD-2004

14

SD-2101
SD-2102

Football

4401,4402
4103

6103

2101

3101

2105

3105

4105

1105

2105

3105

4105

23,24,25,26

1101,1102

2101

3101

23,24,25,26

1101,1102

2101

3101

SD-2103

23,24,25,26,27,28

1101,1102

2101

3101

SD-2104

23,24,25,26,27,28

1101,1102

2101

3101

SD-2105

21,22

1101,1102

2101,2111

SD-2106

15

2105

3105

4105

SD-2107

15

2105

3105

4105

TI-413

1 + Columns 1-4

All

All

All

All

All

TI-2002

1 + Columns 1-4

All

All

All

All

All

TI-2003

2

All

TI-2007

1 + Columns 1-4

All

All

All

All

All

TI-2010

2

All

TI-2011

1 + Columns 1-4

All

All

All

All

All

TI-2013

1 + Columns 1-4

All

All

All

All

All

TI-2014

2 + Columns 1-4

All

All

TI-2015

2

All

All

TI-2019

1

All

All

All

All

All

TI-2101

1

All

All

All

All

All

Sports Code Numbers

6105

All
All

319

Model

Address

Basketball

Volleyball

Wrestling

Hockey

Football

TI-2102

1

All

All

All

All

All

TI-2200

4

All

All

All

All

All

VB-2001

12

2105

VB-2002

15

2105

VB-2101

17

2105

WR-2024

104

3304

WR-2025

104

3304

WR-2026

104

3304

WR-2027

n/a

3304

WR-2028

n/a

3304

WR-2029

n/a

3304

WR-2101

104

3304

WR-2102

104

3304

WR-2103

104

3304

WR-2104

n/a

3304

WR-2105

n/a

3304

WR-2106

n/a

3304

Model #2510

13,29,30

4104

6104

Model #2520

13

1104

2104

3104

4104

6104

Model #2530

13,31,32

1104

2104

3104

4104

6104

Model #3030

13,23,24,25,26

1103

2103

3103

4103

6103

Model #3040

13,23,24,25,26

1103

2103

3103

4103

6103

Model #3050

13,23,24,25,26

1103

2103

3103

4103

6103

Model #3510

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

Model #3520

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

Model #3530

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

Model #4010

13

1103,1104

2103,2104

3103,3104

4103,4104

6103,6104

Model #4020

13

1103,1104

2103,2104

3103,3104

4103,4104

6103,6104

Model #4030

13

1103,1104

2103,2104

3103,3104

4103,4104

6103,6104

Model #4040

13

1103,1104

2103,2104

3103,3104

4103,4104

6103,6104

Model #4050

13

1103,1104

2103,2104

3103,3104

4103,4104

6103,6104

Model #4060

13

1103,1104

2103,2104

3103,3104

4103,4104

6103,6104

Model #4070

13

1103,1104

2103,2104

3103,3104

4103,4104

6103,6104

Model #4080

13

1103,1104

2103,2104

3103,3104

4103,4104

6103,6104

Model #4100

13

1103,1104

2103,2104

3103,3104

4103,4104

6103,6104

Model #4110

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

Model #4510

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

Model #4520

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

Model #4530

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

320

1104

2104

3104

Sports Code Numbers

Notes:
1) code 1101 is Player-Foul and code 1102 is Foul-Player
2) code 2101 is Game Number & Match Number and code 2111 is Game Number only
3) code 3101 is Match Number and code 3102 is Advantage Time
4) Game Clock only

C.2

Outdoor Model Numbers

Model

Address

Baseball

BA-515

61 + Columns 1-8

5501

BA-518

61 + Columns 1-8

5501

BA-618

61 + Columns 1-8

5501

BA-624

61 + Columns 1-8

5501

BA-718

62 + Columns 1-8

5501

BA-1018

12

5501

BA-1518

63

5501

BA-1524

63

5501

BA-2001

67,68,69

5501

BA-2002

67,68,69

5501

BA-2004

67,68,69

5501

BA-2005

67,68,69

5501

BA-2006

11,64,65,66

5500 & 5501 3

BA-2007

11,64,65,66

5500 & 5501 3

BA-2008

11,67,68,69

5500 & 5501 3

BA-2009

11,67,68,69

5500 & 5501 3

BA-2010

61

5501

BA-2011

11,67,68,69

5500 & 5501 3

BA-2012

61

5501

Football

Soccer

Track

Lacrosse

BA-2013

64,65,66,4,11

5500 & 5501 3

BA-2014

67,68,69

5501

BA-2017

61

5501

BA-2018

64,65,66,1

5501

BA-2019

67,68,69

5501

BA-2022

64,70

5501

BA-2515-31

61

5501

BA-2618-31

61

5501

BA-2715-31

62

5501

BA-2718-31

62

5501

BA-3718

64,65,66

5501

BA-3724

64,65,66

5501

FB-824

11

6601

7601

4601

FB-1424

12

5601,5602 1

6601

7601

4601

FB-1430

12

5601,5602 1

6601

7601

FB-1524

12

5601,5602 1

6601

7601

8601 2

4601

FB-1530

12

5601,5602 1

6601

7601

8601 2

4601

FB-1624

15,16

5601,5602 1

6601

7601

8601 2

4601

Sports Code Numbers

4601

321

Model

Address

Baseball

Football

Soccer

Track

Lacrosse

FB-1630

15,16

5601,5602 1

6601

7601

4601

FB-1630L

15,16

5601,5602 1

6601

7601

4601

FB-1730

15,16

5601,5602 1

6601

7601

8601 2

4601

FB-1830

15,16

5601,5602 1

6601

7601

8601 2

4601

FB-1830L

15,16

5601,5602 1

6601

7601

8601 2

4601

FB-2001

15,16

5601,5602 1

6601

7601

8601 2

4601

FB-2002

15,16

5601,5602 1

6601

7601

FB-2003

15,16

5601,5602 1

6601

7601

FB-2004

15,16

5601,5602 1

FB-2005

11

FB-2018

15,19

FB-2019

15,19

FB-2020

15,19

5601,5602 1

FB-2021

15,19

5601,5602 1

FB-2022

15,19

5601,5602 1

FB-2023

15,19

5601,5602 1

FB-2350

12,15

FB-2100

TBD

FB-2110
FB-2120

4601
8601 2

4601

6601

7601

4601

6601

7601

4601

5601,5602 1

6601

7601

8601 2

4601

5601,5602 1

6601

7601

8601 2

4601

6601

7601

8601 2

4601

6601

7601

8601 2

4601

6601

7601

8601 2

4601

8601 2

6601

7601

6601

7601

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

FB-2130

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

FB-2140

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

FB-2150

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

FB-2160

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

FB-2170

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

FB-2180

21,22,23

FB-2190

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

FB-2200

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

FB-2210

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

FB-2220

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

FB-2230

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

FB-2240

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

FB-2300

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

FB-2310

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

FB-2320

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

FB-2330

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

FB-2250

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

FB-2260

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

FB-2270

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

FB-2280

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

FB-2290

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

FB-2360

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

FB-2370

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

FB-2380

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

322

4601
4601

6611

Sports Code Numbers

Model

Address

Baseball

Football

Soccer

SO-824

11

SO-918

11

5601

SO-1424

12

SO-1624

13,14

SO-1830
SO-1830L
SO-1930

15,16

SO-2008

17

5601,5602 1

SO-2009

11

SO-2010

11

Track

6601

7701

4701

6601

7701

4701

5601,5602 1

6601

7701

4701

5601,5602 1

6601

7701

4701

15,16

6601

7701

4701

15,16

6601

7701

4701

6601

7701

6601

7601

4701

5601

6601

7701

4701

5601

6601

7701

4701

8601 2

Lacrosse

4701

SO-2011

11,17

SO-2013

13,14

5601

6601

7701

7711
4701

SO-2018

15,19

5601,5602 1

6601

7701

4701

SO-2019

15,19

5601,5602 1

6601

7701

4701

SO-2021

15,19

5601,5602 1

6601

7701

4701

SO-2022

15,19

5601,5602 1

6601

7701

8601 2

4701

SO-2023

15,19

5601,5602 1

6601

7701

8601 2

4701

SO-2030

15,16

6601

7701

8601 2

4701

SO-2031

11,17

MS-915

11

5601

6601

7601

4601

MS-918

11

5601

6601

7601

4601

MS-2002

11

5601

6601

7601

4601

MS-2003

11

5601

6601

7601

MS-2004

74,75

MS-2006

11

MS-2009

71,72

MS-2011

11

7711

4601
4601

5601
5601

6601

7601

4601

6601

7601

4601

6601

7601

4601

6601

7601

4601

6601

7601

TBD

TBD

TBD
TBD

MS-2012

74,75

MS-2014

71,72,73

4601

MS-2015

71

MS-2016

TBD

TBD

MS-2017

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

MS-2018

71,72,73

6601

7601

4601

MS-2118

71,72

6601

7601

4601

MS-2918

71,72

6601

7601

4601

TI-218

2

All

TI-418

1

All

All

All

All

All

TI-2002

1 + Columns 1-4

All

All

All

All

All

TI-2003

2

TI-2007

1 + Columns 1-4

All

All

All

All

All

TI-2010

2

TI-2011

1 + Columns 1-4

All

All

All

All

All

TI-2013

1 + Columns 1-4

All

All

All

All

All

4601
TBD
TBD

All

All

All

All

All

TI-2014

2 + Columns 1-4

All

All

TI-2015

2

All

All

Sports Code Numbers

323

Model

Address

Baseball

Football

Soccer

Track

Lacrosse

TI-2019

1

All

All

All

All

All

TI-2101

1

All

All

All

All

All

Notes:
1) Code 5601 is With Clock and code 5602 is With Out Clock.
2) To receive data from an external timer substitute code 8602 for the Omega PowerTime
and code 8603 for the Daktronics Omni Sport 1000/6000.
3) Requires two (2) consoles to operate scoreboard.

C.3

Miscellaneous Model Numbers

Model

Address

Sport

Code

CR-2001

11

Cricket

5599

BA-2003

11

Pitch & Speed

5500

CT-2001

1

Pitch & Speed

5500

CT-2002

1

Pitch & Speed

5500

CT-2003

1 + Columns 1-4

Pitch & Speed

5500

CT-2004

1 + Columns 1-4

Pitch & Speed

5500

CT-2005

1

Pitch & Speed

5500

CT-2009

1 + Columns 1-4

Pitch & Speed

5500

TI-2003

2

Pitch & Speed

5500

CT-2001

1

Event Timer

372,374,376

CT-2002

1

Event Timer

372,374,376

CT-2003

1 + Columns 1-4

Event Timer

372,374,376

CT-2004

1 + Columns 1-4

Event Timer

372,374,376

CT-2005

1

Event Timer

372,374,376

CT-2006

1 + Columns 1-4

Event Timer

372,374,376

CT-2007

1 + Columns 1-4

Event Timer

372,374,376

CT-2008

1 + Columns 1-4

Event Timer

372,374,376

CT-2009

1 + Columns 1-4

Event Timer

372,374,376

MS-2007

10

Rugby

7701

BB-2014

1 + Columns 5-8

Multi-Purpose Timer

99

TI-413

1 + Columns 1-4

Multi-Purpose Timer

99

TI-418

1 + Columns 1-4

Multi-Purpose Timer

99

TI-2002

1 + Columns 1-4

Multi-Purpose Timer

99

TI-2003

2

Multi-Purpose Timer

99

TI-2006

22

Multi-Purpose Timer

99

TI-2007

1 + Columns 1-4

Multi-Purpose Timer

99

TI-2009

22

Multi-Purpose Timer

99

TI-2010

2 + Columns 1-4

Multi-Purpose Timer

99

TI-2011

1 + Columns 1-4

Multi-Purpose Timer

99

324

Sports Code Numbers

Model

Address

Sport

Code

TI-2013

1 + Columns 1-4

Multi-Purpose Timer

99

TI-2014

2 + Columns 1-4

Multi-Purpose Timer

99

TI-2015

2 + Columns 1-4

Multi-Purpose Timer

99

RO-2002

11

Rodeo

8000 1

RO-2005

11

Rodeo

8000 1

RO-2006

11

Rodeo

8000 1

RO-2008

12

Rodeo

8000 1

RO-2009

12

Rodeo

8000 1

RO-2010

12

Rodeo

8000 1

RO-2011

12

Rodeo

8000 1

BB-2015

1

Segment Timer

100

FB-2340

1

Segment Timer

100

TI-2010

2 + Columns 1-4

Segment Timer

100

TI-2012

1

Segment Timer

100

TI-2015

2 + Columns 1-4

Segment Timer

100

BB-114

17

Tennis

220

BB-2041

12,14

Tennis

220

BB-2042

12,14

Tennis

220

BB-2046

12,14

Tennis

220

BB-2047

12,14

Tennis

220

BB-2101

17

Tennis

220

BB-2102

17

Tennis

220

BB-2105

17

Tennis

220

BB-2106

17

Tennis

220

BB-2116

17

Tennis

220

BB-2117

14

Tennis

220

BB-2121

17

Tennis

220

BB-2122

17

Tennis

220

BB-2123

17,14

Tennis

220

BB-2124

17,14

Tennis

220

TN-2007

11

Tennis

220

TN-2008

11

Tennis

220

TN-2009

74

Tennis

220

TN-2016

11

Tennis

220

TN-2501

11

Tennis

220

TN-2603

11

Tennis

220

TN-2604

11

Tennis

220

TN-2605

74

Tennis

220

WR-2021

101

Judo

281 or 284

WR-2022

102

Karate

282 or 285

WR-2023

103

Tae Kwon Do

283 or 286

Sports Code Numbers

325

Model

Address

Sport

Code

Game/Shot Clock Console

1,2

Basketball

1000

Game/Play Clock Console

1,2

Football

6000

Shots On Goal Console

74

Hockey

4000

See Table for Indoor Models

1,2,12,13,17

Boxing

291

Relay Driver

220
Team Name

98

TNMC – Home/Guest Team Name

221

TNMC – Player-Foul-Points Caption

223

Notes:
1) Code 8000 is available on the All Sport 5100 console only.

C.4

Custom Indoor Facility

Site

Contract

Belgrade Arena

Basketball

Volleyball

Wrestling

Hockey

9100

9200

9300

9400
9409

9202

9302

American Airlines Center

C9443

9101

Resch Center

C10014

9102

Bismark Civic Center

C10379

9104

Coliseo De Puerto Rico
SE Texas Entertainment
Tyson/IBP Events Center

C10617
C10713
C10976

9105

9205

University of South Dakota

9107

9207

Brigham Young Univ.
Custom contract retrofit

9108

C13404

9111

Madison Square Garden

C14199

9112

9602

9405

9605

9607

Boxing
9901

9412

Football

Soccer

Track

9703

Custom Outdoor Facility

Site

Contract

SUNY Cortland

C10032

9603

3COM Park

C11471

9606

University of South Carolina
Custom contract retrofit

SVO
238271

9610

326

9601

9402

9409

Georgia Dome

C.5

9401

9307(resv)

Belgrade Arena (see above)
Custom handball (3 pen)

Football

Baseball

Lacross
e
9403

Sports Code Numbers

Appendix D: Quick Reference
All Sport 5000® Standard Keys
Note: Refer to Section 2.6 Standard Keys for more detailed operating instructions.
Start/Stop Clock
•  and  control the function of the main clock. The green LED on the 
button is illuminated when the clock is running.

Horn
•  sounds the main horn. The horn sounds for as long as the horn key is pressed.
•  sets the horn to automatically sound when a period end is reached. The yellow
LED on the  is illuminated when the auto horn setting is ON.

Clock Direction
•  sets the direction of the main clock. The clock direction is shown in the
upper right corner of the LCD.
• This key is disabled while the clock is running.
Set Main Clock
• The first press of the  edits the current main clock value.
• Press the  repetitively to edit the configured period, break, and overtime
length.
• Press  at any of the displayed clock values to load that value into the main clock.
• This key is disabled while the clock is running.

Edit Key
•  is used to edit sport values. Press  followed by the desired score or other data to
be edited. Refer to the specific sport documentation for the edit key function.

Quick Reference

327

All Sport 5000® Segment Timer
Note: Refer to Section: 3 Segment Timer Operation for more detailed operating instructions.
First and Last Segment
•  and  set the range of segments to be used.

Auto Stop
•  sets the console to stop at the end of each segment or at the end of the last
segment.

Current Segment
•  increments the current segment value

Reset
•  sets the segment time to the current segment value and stops
the clock.
•  sets the segment number and time to the value of the first segment
This key is disabled while the clock is running.

Interval
•  sets the interval time.
•  sets the console to display interval time between segments.

Segment Time Editing
•  allows the time for a specified segment to be edited. Once the segment time
is edited, pressing the up or down arrow key scrolls through the segment times and allows any
other segments to be edited.
•  copies a time value to a range of segments.

Edit Key Function
• Press  followed by  to edit the current segment value.

328

Quick Reference

All Sport 5000® Baseball
Note: Refer to Section 4: Baseball Operation for more detailed operating instructions.
Start-Up
• Turn the Power Switch ON.
• At the Resume Game? Y/N prompt:
• Press  to resume the game where last shut off.
or
• Press  to enter a new sport code number.
At Bat
•  turns the at bat indicators on or off.

Batter Number
•  edits the current batter number.

Batter Average
•  edits the current batter average.

Inning Number
•  increments the current inning number.

Outs
•  increments the out number for the current team at bat.

Ball and Strike Count
•  and  increment the count for the current batter.
•  clears the count.
• To increment the ball and strike count for the pitcher automatically with 
and
, use the Auto Increment Pitches setting in the Menu under Edit Settings.

Pitch Count Balls, Pitch Count Strikes, Foul Balls, Inplay
• , ,  and
 keys increment the total of each type of pitch for the respective team pitcher.
• These keys DO NOT increment the ball and strike count. See Ball and Strike Count above.
•  will clear all pitch count types for the respective team’s pitcher.
• To increment the ball and strike count for the pitcher automatically with 
and
, use the Auto Increment Pitches setting in the Menu under Edit Settings.
Hit and Error Indicators/Digits
Quick Reference

329

•
•

 or  turn on or off their respective scoreboard indicators.
The  key may also prompt for an error position depending on the Error Position
setting
• The total Team Hits and Errors are modified using the  and  keys. See
Team Hits, Errors, Left On Base below.
Team Hits, Errors, Left On Base
• , ,  increment their respective team totals.

Team Runs
•  increments team runs.
• Team Runs are scored by total or by inning depending on the Score by Inning setting.

Edit Key Function
• Press  followed by any of the following keys to edit their respective values.
, , , , , ,
, , , 

330

Quick Reference

All Sport 5000® Basketball
Note: Refer to Section 7: Basketball Operation for more detailed operating instructions.
Start-Up
• Turn the Power Switch ON.
• At the Resume Game? Y/N prompt:
• Press  to resume the game where last shut off.
or
• Press  to enter a new sport code number.

Team Score
• , ,  and  increment and decrement the team
score.
• The console may ask for a player number depending on the setting of Team Score – Update
Player in the Menu under Edit Settings.

Team Fouls
•  and  increment and decrement the total team fouls.
•  blanks the displayed player-foul digits.
• The console may ask for a player number depending on the setting of Team Score – Update
Player in the Menu under Edit Settings.

Time Out
•  displays the number of full (1st press) or partial (2nd press) timeouts (if applicable.)
Press enter to take a time out for the selected team.
•  selects a full (1st press) or partial (2nd press) time out and starts the time
out clock.
• The time out clock may be displayed on the main scoreboard depending on the Time Outs –
Show on Main setting in the Menu under Edit Settings.

Possession
•  turns the possession indicators on or off for the respective team.

Bonus
•  turns the 1-on-1 bonus indicators or 2-shot bonus indicators on or off.

Period
•  increments the period value.

Shot Clock Time

Quick Reference

331

•

 changes the current value of the shot clock timer. Pressing  a second time allows the reset value of the shot clock timer to be edited.

Player Roster Keys
•  selects the player number for statistics edit. Pressing  or  within the player statistics edit screen changes the status of the player selected. Press
the arrow keys to edit the foul or points values for the chosen player. Press the up or down arrow
keys to move to a different player.
•  deletes the selected player from the roster.

Player Substitution
•  substitutes a player currently out of the game for a player who is in the game.
•  substitutes five players who are currently out of the game for all of the in-game
players.

Edit Key Function
• Press  followed by any of the following keys to edit their respective values.
, ,, , , ,
, , ,


332

Quick Reference

All Sport 5000® Football

Note: Refer to Section 8: Football Operation for more detailed operating instructions.
Start-Up
• Turn the Power Switch ON.
• At the Resume Game? Y/N prompt:
• Press  to resume the game where last shut off.
or
• Press  to enter a new sport code number.

Team Score
• , , , , and  increment and
decrement the team score.

Quarter
•  increments the quarter number.

Ball On
•  edits the current Ball On location.
• If the setting of Ball On Auto Calculate in Edit Settings is yes, the console will calculate Down
and Yards To Go values from the Ball On value.
• When  is pressed, the console will prompt for side of field, and then display the
Down and Yards To Go values for verification.

Down
•  increments the down number.
•  only functions when the setting of Ball On Auto Calculate is yes. It
will recall the Ball On, Down, and Yards To Go values of the previous play.

Yards To Go
•  edits the current setting.

First and 10
 sets the Down value to 1 and the Yards to go value to 10 for a first down.

Time Out
• The first press of  displays the number of full time outs for the selected team. The
second press displays the number of partial timeouts (if applicable.) Press enter to take a time
out for the selected team.
Quick Reference

333

•
•

The  selects a full (1st press) or partial (2nd press) time out and starts the
time out clock.
The time out clock may be displayed on the main scoreboard using the Time Outs Show on
Main setting in the Menu under Edit Settings.

Possession
•  turns the possession indicators on or off for the respective team.
• If the setting of Ball On Auto Calculate is yes, the console will prompt for the play direction to
calculate down and yards to go values. Press 1 or 3 to indicate the new play direction.

Play Clock Time
•  changes the current value of the play clock timer. Pressing  a second or third time allows the reset values of the play clock timer to be edited.

Team Statistics
•  and  edit their respective team total.
•  increments the number of first downs for the respective team.

Edit Key Function
• Press  followed by any of the following keys to edit the respective value
, , , , ,
, , , ,


334

Quick Reference

All Sport 5000® Hockey

Note: Refer to Section 9: Hockey Operation for more detailed operating instructions.
Start-Up
• Turn the Power Switch ON.
• At the Resume Game? Y/N prompt:
• Press  to resume the game where last shut off.
or
• Press  to enter a new sport code number.

Team Score
•  and  increment and decrement the team score.

Time Out
• The first press of  displays the number of full time outs for the selected team. The
second press displays the number of partial timeouts (if applicable.) Press enter to take a time
out for the selected team.
• The  selects a full (1st press) or partial (2nd press) time out and starts the
time out clock.
• The time out clock may be displayed on the main scoreboard using the Time Outs Show on
Main setting in the Menu under Edit Settings.

Period
•  increments the current period number.

Shots on Goal
•  and  increment and decrement the team shots
on goal.

Saves
•  and  increment and decrement the team goalie saves.

Penalty
•  turns on or off the penalty indicators for the selected team.
•  sets the player number and penalty time for the selected team.
• ,  set the penalty length to the configured values.
•  deletes a player-penalty time. Each press scrolls through the list
of player and
penalty times for the selected team.
•  deletes all player-penalty times for the selected team.
Quick Reference

335

•

 and  control the automatic
decrement of the penalty clocks with the main clock. The current status is shown as an EN or DS
in the bottom right corner of the LCD screen.
Edit Key Function
• Press  followed by any of the following keys to edit the respective value
, , , , ,
, , , 

336

Quick Reference

All Sport 5000® Soccer
Note: Refer to Section 12: Soccer Operation for more detailed operating instructions.

Start-Up
• Turn the Power Switch ON.
• At the Resume Game? Y/N prompt:
• Press  to resume the game where last shut off.
or
• Press  to enter a new sport code number.

Team Score
•  and  increment and decrement the team score.

Time Out
• The first press of  displays the number of full time outs for the selected team. The
second press displays the number of partial timeouts (if applicable.) Press enter to take a time
out for the selected team.
• The  selects a full (1st press) or partial (2nd press) time out and starts the
time out clock.
• The time out clock may be displayed on the main scoreboard depending on the Time Outs –
Show on Main setting in the Menu under Edit Settings.

Half
•  increments the current half number.

Shots on Goal
•  and  increment and decrement the team shots
on goal.

Saves
•  and  increment and decrement the team goalie saves.

Penalty Kicks
•  and  increment and decrement the team penalty
kicks.

Corner Kicks
•  and  increment and decrement the team corner
kicks.
Fouls
Quick Reference

337

•

 and  increment and decrement the team fouls.

Edit Key Function
• Press  followed by any of the following keys to edit the respective value
, , , < SHOTS ON GOAL-1>, , <
SAVES-1>, , ,
, , ,
,

338

Quick Reference

All Sport 5000® Track
Note: Refer to Section 12: Track Operation for more detailed operating instructions.

Start-Up
• Turn the Power Switch ON.
• At the Resume Game? Y/N prompt:
• Press  to resume the game where last shut off.
or
• Press  to enter a new sport code number.

Team Score
• , and score keys for home and guest 1 increment and edit the team total score.
• The Guest 2 and Guest 3 score keys can also edit team scores if the setting of Guest 2,3 Value is
Score.

Reset
•  resets the main clock. This only applies to the manual input code (code 8601.)

Place
•  edits the current place value.

Lane
•  edits the current lane value.

Events
•  edits the current event value if the setting of Guest 2,3 Value is
Event/Heat.
• The event value will be overwritten if the console is connected to an external timer.

Heat
•  edits the current heat value if the setting of Guest 2,3 Value is
Event/Heat.
• The heat value will be overwritten if the console is connected to an external timer.

Edit Key Function
• Press  followed by  to edit the current team score value.

Quick Reference

339

All Sport 5000® Volleyball
Note: Refer to Section 13: Volleyball Operation for more detailed operating instructions.

Start-Up
• Turn the Power Switch ON.
• At the Resume Game? Y/N prompt:
• Press  to resume the game where last shut off.
or
• Press  to enter a new sport code number.

Team Score
•  and  increment and decrement the team score.

Games Won
•  increments the number of games won for the respective team.

Serve
•  turns the serve indicators on or off for the respective team.

Game and Match Number
•  increments the game number. The current game number is shown in the bottom
right corner of the LCD. Game scores will be reset to zero for the start of the next game. Press
 to recover the previous game scores.
•  increments the match number.

Aces, Blocks, Kills, Digs
• , ,  and  increment their respective team totals.
• The console may ask for a player number depending on the setting of Team Stats – Update
Player in Edit Settings.
• Team statistics will be displayed based on the setting of User Defined settings for scoreboards
displaying two of the stats.

Time Out
• The first press of  displays the number of full time outs for the selected team. The
second press displays the number of partial timeouts (if applicable.) Press enter to take a time
out for the selected team.
• The  selects a full (1st press) or partial (2nd press) time out and starts the
time out clock.
• The time out clock may be displayed on the main scoreboard depending on the Time Outs –
Show on Main setting in the Menu under Edit Settings.
Quick Reference

341

Player Roster Keys
•  selects the player number for statistics edit. Pressing  or  within the player statistics edit screen changes the status of the player selected. Press
the left and right arrow keys to edit the aces, kills, blocks, and digs for the selected player. Press
the up or down arrow keys to move to a different player.
•  deletes the selected player from the roster.

Player Substitution
•  substitutes a player currently out of the game for a player who is in the game.
•  substitutes six players who are currently out of the game for all of the in-game
players.

Edit Key Function
• Press  followed by any of the following keys to edit the respective value
, , , , , , ,
, , , 
• Pressing the up or down arrow keys after pressing  scrolls through the
game scores for the selected team.

342

Quick Reference

All Sport 5000® Wrestling
Note: Refer to Section 14: Wrestling Operation for more detailed operating instructions.
Start-Up
• Turn the Power Switch ON.
• At the Resume Game? Y/N prompt:
• Press  to resume the game where last shut off.
or
• Press  to enter a new sport code number.

Team Score
•  and  increment and decrement the team score.
• , , , and  increment and decrement the match score.

Match Number
•  increments the match number.
•  resets the match score and sets match time to the configured Period length.

Period
•  increments the period number.

Injury and Blood Time
• , ,  and
 control the injury and blood time out timers.
• The Blood and Injury time can be displayed on the scoreboard using the Blood/Injury Show on
Main setting in the Menu under Edit Settings.

Advantage Time
• ,  and  are used to control the advantage timer. Press the team advantage key
to set the clock to decrease the opposing team advantage time or increase the selected team
advantage time. Press the
 to stop the advantage timer.

Edit Key Function
• Press  followed by any of the following keys to edit the respective value
, , , ,
, , , 
• Pressing  and , ,  or  while the time-out clock is stopped will edit the current value
of the respective timer.
Quick Reference

343



File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 416
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-14, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:ae68f3d3-3433-473a-8b6c-48b9558dad85
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 6.0.1 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2007:09:10 14:44:35-05:00
Creator Tool                    : PScript5.dll Version 5.2.2
Modify Date                     : 2007:11:07 16:45:44-06:00
Metadata Date                   : 2007:11:07 16:45:44-06:00
Document ID                     : uuid:3d2003cd-89f7-4249-93dd-afbe194130cb
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : drozier
Title                           : Microsoft Word - ED.doc
Author                          : drozier